HP StoreOnce Backup System User Guide

8/15/2019 HP StoreOnce Backup System User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hp-storeonce-backup-system-user-guide 1/269

HP StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700,and 4900 Backup system user guide

AbstractThis is the user guide for the HP StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700 and 4900 Backup system and is intended for userswho install, operate and maintain the HP StoreOnce Backup system. It is also valid for the older HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220 and 4420/4430 Backup models.

Always check www.hp.com/go/storage/docs for the most current documentation, including localized versions (in PDF format)for your product. (Search on Product Name and select the Product Manuals option.)Refer to the Quick Specs on http://www.hp.com/ for supported features for your model and the current status.

HP Part Number: BB903-90927Published: March 2015Edition: 11

http://www.hp.com/

http://www.hp.com/go/storage/docs



© Copyright 2011–2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.Confidential computer software. Valid license from HP required for possession, use or copying. Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, CommercialComputer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S. Government undervendor's standard commercial license.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the expresswarranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shallnot be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Warranty

WARRANTY STATEMENT: To obtain a copy of the warranty for this product, see the warranty information website:

http://www.hp.com/go/storagewarranty

Acknowledgments

Microsoft, Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Itanium are trademarks or registered trademarks of IntelCorporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

The HP StoreOnce Backup system product firmware includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/ ).

Revision HistoryNovember 2011Revision 1

First edition, issued with the launch of the HP StoreOnce B6200 Backup system. June 2012Revision 2

Second edition, includes the major StoreOnce feature updates, StoreOnce Catalyst.November 2012Revision 3

Third edition, issued with the launch of the HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220 and 4420/4430 Backup systems. It should also be used with HPStoreOnce B6200 Backup systems running 3.5.0 software.

May 2013Revision 4Fourth edition, issued with the 3.6.0 version of HP StoreOnce software and valid for all HP StoreOnce Backup systems.

June 2013Revision 5Fifth edition, issued with the 3.7.0 version of HP StoreOnce software and valid for the HP StoreOnce VSA Backup system only.

July 2013Revision 6Sixth edition, issued with the 3.8.0 version of HP StoreOnce software and valid for HP StoreOnce 2700, 4500, 4700, and 4900 Backup systemsonly. It is not valid for the HP StoreOnce B6200 Backup system or the HP StoreOnce VSA Backup system.

September 2013Revision 7Seventh edition, issued with the 3.9.0 version of HP StoreOnce software.

January 2014Revision 8Eighth edition, issued with the 3.10.0 version of HP StoreOnce software.

January 2014Revision 9Ninth edition, contains minor text updates.

August 2014Revision 10Tenth edition, issued with the 3.11.0 version of the HP StoreOnce software.

March 2015Revision 11Eleventh edition, issued with the 3.12.0 version of HP StoreOnce software.


http://www.openssl.org/







Contents1 Getting started...........................................................................................9

This guide................................................................................................................................9Overview of the HP StoreOnce Backup system..............................................................................9User types and user roles.........................................................................................................10Network configuration.............................................................................................................11Power on and power off..........................................................................................................11

Manually powering on the system (cold boot)........................................................................11Location of power on buttons, HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup................................................12Location of power on buttons, HP StoreOnce 2700, 4500, and 4700 Backup.......................12Location of power on buttons, HP 2620, 4210/4220, and 4420/4430...............................13

Power off using the CLI.......................................................................................................13Rebooting the system using the CLI.......................................................................................14

Navigating the HP StoreOnce Graphical User Interface (GUI)......................................................14Navigating the online help......................................................................................................15The StoreOnce CLI..................................................................................................................16Licensing...............................................................................................................................17

Licensing requirements for StoreOnce hardware products........................................................17 Applying the Instant On license...........................................................................................17To apply a full license.........................................................................................................18

Security features.....................................................................................................................192 StoreOnce functions..................................................................................21

Overview of the HP StoreOnce page.........................................................................................21System information and status...................................................................................................21

3 VTL (Virtual Tape Libraries) functions...........................................................23 VTL Configuration page...........................................................................................................23

Fibre Channel Settings tab..................................................................................................23Port assignment for StoreOnce Backup systems with two Fibre Channel cards........................24

iSCSI Settings tab..............................................................................................................25Libraries page........................................................................................................................25

Device Details tab..............................................................................................................26To create a new library (administrators only).....................................................................30To edit library details (administrators only)........................................................................31To delete a library (administrators only)............................................................................32

Emulation types for tape devices..........................................................................................32Interface Information tab.....................................................................................................33

To change drive assignment on Fibre Channel ports...........................................................35 Active Connections tab.......................................................................................................35Cartridges tab...................................................................................................................36

To create a cartridge (administrators only)........................................................................37To delete a cartridge (administrators only)........................................................................37To delete all or a range of cartridges (administrators only)..................................................38To write protect a cartridge (administrators only)...............................................................38To edit maximum cartridge size (administrators only)..........................................................39To move or unload cartridges.........................................................................................39To edit barcodes in bulk.................................................................................................40

Make Replication Target libraries visible to the host.....................................................................414 NAS functions..........................................................................................43

NAS server configuration page ...............................................................................................43CIFS server tab..................................................................................................................44

Configuring None authentication mode............................................................................45Contents 3



Configuring User authentication mode.............................................................................45Configuring AD authentication mode...............................................................................50

NFS server tab..................................................................................................................59Configuring NFS server hosts..........................................................................................59

NAS share configuration page.................................................................................................61List of shares......................................................................................................................61Create NAS shares............................................................................................................62

Create CIFS shares........................................................................................................64

Create NFS shares........................................................................................................74Edit NAS share details........................................................................................................78Delete NAS shares.............................................................................................................79Using CIFS shares under Windows.......................................................................................79Using NFS shares under UNIX or Linux environments..............................................................83

5 Replication functions.................................................................................85 What is an appliance?............................................................................................................85

How do I identify the IP address of a StoreOnce appliance?....................................................86Status tab..............................................................................................................................86Partner Appliances (Replication)...............................................................................................87

Target Appliances tab........................................................................................................88

Source Appliances tab.......................................................................................................89Source Appliance Permissions tab........................................................................................90Local Settings (Replication) tab.................................................................................................92

General settings tab...........................................................................................................92Bandwidth Limiting tab.......................................................................................................93Blackout Windows tab........................................................................................................94

Event History (Replication) tab..................................................................................................95 VT Mappings (Replication).......................................................................................................97

Source and target library mappings.....................................................................................97Running the replication wizard (virtual tape devices)...............................................................99Recovering a Source Appliance (Virtual Tape devices)..........................................................103

NAS Mappings (Replication)..................................................................................................105Source and target share details..........................................................................................106Running the replication wizard (NAS).................................................................................108Recovering a Source Appliance (NAS shares)......................................................................111

Reverse replication using the wizard..............................................................................112Promoting a Target Share over the WAN using NAS.......................................................114

6 HP StoreOnce Catalyst functions...............................................................115 What is HP StoreOnce Catalyst?............................................................................................115StoreOnce Catalyst terminology..............................................................................................116StoreOnce Catalyst page.......................................................................................................116

StoreOnce Catalyst Status tab............................................................................................117StoreOnce Catalyst Settings tab.........................................................................................118StoreOnce Catalyst Clients tab..........................................................................................118StoreOnce Catalyst Blackout Windows tab..........................................................................120StoreOnce Catalyst Bandwidth Limiting Windows tab...........................................................121Fibre Channel Settings tab................................................................................................122

StoreOnce Catalyst Stores page.............................................................................................124Store details tab..............................................................................................................125Permissions tab (administrators only)...................................................................................128Item summary tab............................................................................................................128Data jobs tab..................................................................................................................130Outbound copy jobs tab...................................................................................................133Inbound copy jobs tab......................................................................................................137System information messages.............................................................................................141

4 Contents



7 Housekeeping function............................................................................143The Housekeeping page........................................................................................................143Configuring blackout windows................................................................................................146Pausing housekeeping...........................................................................................................146

8 StoreOnce reporting...............................................................................147 Activity report.......................................................................................................................147Reporting page....................................................................................................................148

9 Hardware Problem and Storage Reporting.................................................150Hardware Problem Report......................................................................................................150Hardware problem details.................................................................................................150

Storage Report.....................................................................................................................15110 Hardware............................................................................................152

Monitoring the StoreOnce Backup server ................................................................................153Monitoring the storage .........................................................................................................156Drives (enclosure)..................................................................................................................158HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220, and 4420/4430 hardware tree............................................158

Monitoring the HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220 and 4420/4430 server...............................158Monitoring the SA controller for StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220, and 4420/4430....................159

11 HP Remote Support...............................................................................161Overview............................................................................................................................161General procedure for setting up Remote Support on the StoreOnce GUI.....................................161

Locating warranty info - HP 4900......................................................................................164Locating warranty info - HP 4700.......................................................................................165Locating warranty info - HP 4500......................................................................................166Locating warranty info - HP 2700.......................................................................................167Locating warranty info — HP 2900....................................................................................167

HP Remote Support page......................................................................................................167Configuring and modifying HP Remote Support........................................................................168Customer Information page....................................................................................................170

Entering and modifying customer information......................................................................170Server page.........................................................................................................................171

Entering and modifying entitlement information for the server.................................................171Storage page.......................................................................................................................172

Entering and modifying entitlement information for storage expansions...................................172Switch page.........................................................................................................................173

Entering and modifying entitlement information for switches...................................................173Status page.........................................................................................................................174

12 Reporting Central..................................................................................176 Appliance registration...........................................................................................................176

Registering an appliance..................................................................................................177Exporting a certificate......................................................................................................178Import certificates............................................................................................................178Modify appliance details..................................................................................................179Unregister appliance........................................................................................................179

Group configuration..............................................................................................................180 Appliances.....................................................................................................................180

Creating an appliance group.......................................................................................181Modifying an appliance group.....................................................................................182Deleting an appliance group........................................................................................183

Virtual devices.................................................................................................................183Creating or modifying a virtual device group..................................................................184

Entering or modifying group details..........................................................................185Contents 5



Adding or modifying libraries .................................................................................185 Adding or modifying shares.....................................................................................185 Adding or modifying StoreOnce Catalyst stores..........................................................186

Deleting a virtual device group.....................................................................................186Removing a device from a device group.........................................................................187

Reports................................................................................................................................187 Appliance reports............................................................................................................188

Appliance status reports...............................................................................................188

Replication status........................................................................................................191 Appliance throughput reports........................................................................................191 Appliance storage reports............................................................................................192

Appliance deduplication ratio report.........................................................................192 Appliance capacity usage report..............................................................................192 Appliance capacity forecasting report.......................................................................193

Device reports.................................................................................................................194Device status reports....................................................................................................194Device throughput reports.............................................................................................195Device storage reports.................................................................................................195

Device deduplication ratio.......................................................................................195Device capacity usage............................................................................................196

13 Access and Device Configuration............................................................197Device Configuration page....................................................................................................197Firmware.............................................................................................................................197User Management................................................................................................................199

To add a user (administrator only)......................................................................................199To add a group (administrator only)...................................................................................201To modify a user..............................................................................................................201To delete a user or group (administrator only)......................................................................202

User Interface.......................................................................................................................203SSL certificates.................................................................................................................203

Email..................................................................................................................................205Test email.......................................................................................................................206Events (Email)..................................................................................................................206To manage email notifications...........................................................................................207

Support Ticket......................................................................................................................207Data collection................................................................................................................208

Collect data...............................................................................................................209Download data collection............................................................................................210Delete data collection..................................................................................................210

Maintenance.......................................................................................................................21014 Network configuration...........................................................................211

Network configuration basics.................................................................................................211Network configuration components....................................................................................211Port numbering for hardware products................................................................................213Network bonding modes..................................................................................................213

VLAN Subnets with HP StoreOnce Backup..........................................................................214 VLAN guidelines.........................................................................................................214Example network environment.......................................................................................215

Network configuration guidelines...........................................................................................215Configuring the network on the StoreOnce GUI (administrator only)............................................216

At installation..................................................................................................................216 After installation..............................................................................................................217

Network Configuration List.....................................................................................................217Current Network Configuration...............................................................................................217

6 Contents



Factory Default Network Configuration....................................................................................218Custom Network Configuration List..........................................................................................218To add a custom configuration...............................................................................................219To view a custom configuration...............................................................................................223To edit a custom configuration................................................................................................225

To add a VLAN–enabled Port Set and VLAN Subnet............................................................225To write protect or un-protect a configuration.......................................................................225

To delete a custom configuration.............................................................................................225

15 Events..................................................................................................226To delete events from the log..................................................................................................228

16 Configuration save and restore process....................................................229Configuration file..................................................................................................................229

When should a configuration file be generated?..................................................................229Contents of the configuration text file ......................................................................................229Settings restored after automatic recovery ...............................................................................231Performing a configuration save .............................................................................................232Prerequisites for a configuration restore ...................................................................................232Restoring from the configuration zip file...................................................................................232Performing a full configuration restore on a StoreOnce Backup system..........................................233Deleting configuration files from an appliance..........................................................................233

17 Storage management............................................................................234RAID configuration...............................................................................................................234Identifying a failed disk.........................................................................................................235Replacing a hot plug disk in a 4900 disk enclosure..................................................................236

Important Safety information..............................................................................................236To install the drives...........................................................................................................237

If several disks fail................................................................................................................239Expanding storage after adding storage..................................................................................240Expanding storage by adding a previously configured expansion shelf........................................240

18 Basic troubleshooting............................................................................242 Accessing the CLI.................................................................................................................242Password problems...............................................................................................................243Pulling a Support Ticket.........................................................................................................243Licensing problems...............................................................................................................243Multiple users.......................................................................................................................244Connecting to the StoreOnce Backup system from the backup application....................................244Timeout problems with NAS CIFS shares..................................................................................244NFS State handle error..........................................................................................................245If backup or replication fails...................................................................................................245StoreOnce Catalyst troubleshooting.........................................................................................246Performance.........................................................................................................................246StoreOnce Backup system configuration problems.....................................................................246Upgrade licenses..................................................................................................................247

19 Advanced troubleshooting......................................................................248Important information about serial numbers (HP StoreOnce 4700 and 4900 only).........................248

VLAN networking problems...................................................................................................248Software update process.......................................................................................................248Firmware updates.................................................................................................................249Using the 10GbE ports (HP StoreOnce 4900/4700/4500/44xx)..............................................249Power On/Off Problems........................................................................................................249Cannot authenticate an iSCSI session......................................................................................250If the HP StoreOnce Backup system runs out of disk space..........................................................250

Contents 7



Reduced performance using Data in Flight Encryption................................................................250Cannot access a storage shelf (HP StoreOnce 4xxx Backup systems)...........................................250Replacement of hardware......................................................................................................251Quick Restore ISO Image ......................................................................................................251If complete data loss occurs...................................................................................................251

20 SNMP.................................................................................................252SNMP (Configuration)...........................................................................................................252

HP Systems Insight Manager.............................................................................................25221 Key Parameters.....................................................................................257

StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700, and 4900 Backup..........................................................257StoreOnce 2610, 2620, 4220, 4420, and 4430 Backup...........................................................259

22 Support and other resources..................................................................261Contacting HP......................................................................................................................261Related information...............................................................................................................261

Product documentation.....................................................................................................261Other useful websites.......................................................................................................261

Typographic conventions.......................................................................................................262Customer self repair..............................................................................................................262

A Regulatory information............................................................................263Belarus Kazakhstan Russia marking.........................................................................................263Turkey RoHS material content declaration.................................................................................263Ukraine RoHS material content declaration..............................................................................263

Warranty information............................................................................................................263Index.......................................................................................................264

8 Contents



1 Getting startedFurther information• This guide (page 9)• Overview of HP StoreOnce Backup products (page 9)•

User types and user roles (page 10)• Network configuration (page 11)• “Power off and power on” (page 11)• Navigating the StoreOnce Graphical User Interface (GUI) (page 14)• Navigating the online help (page 15)• The StoreOnce CLI (page 16)• Licensing (page 17)• Security Features (page 19)

This guideThis guide contains detailed information on using the StoreOnce GUI and includes some CommandLine Interface commands and troubleshooting information.• Tasks available only in the StoreOnce GUI are described only in this guide.• Tasks available in both the GUI and CLI are described in this guide. (The CLI command is

described in greater detail in the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide .)• Tasks only available in the CLI are described fully in the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI

Reference Guide . Those tasks may not be described in this guide.

Overview of the HP StoreOnce Backup systemTable 1 StoreOnce 2700, 4500, 4700, 4900, and VSA models

Storage expansionPortsDescriptionProduct model

Not supported4 x 1GbE ports A single server with four 2TBhot-plug disks (iSCSI only)

HP StoreOnce 2700 8TBBackup, BB877A

One 12–disk expansionshelf, BB881A

4 x 1GbE ports 2 x 10GbEports2 x FC ports

A single server with twelve2TB hot-plug disks


Up to seven 12–diskexpansion shelves, BB881A


A head server unit with two1TB disks and a


pre-configured storage array

with twelve 2TB disksUp to five 11–diskexpansion kits for the first


A head server unit with two1TB disks and a


disk enclosure, BB908A.pre-configured two-drawerOne additional diskdisk enclosure with elevenenclosure with 11+4 spare4TB disks and four hot spare

disks pre-configured storage,BB904A, with up to a furtherfive 11–disk expansion kits,BB908A

NOTE: The HP StoreOnce 2700 supports VTL on iSCSI only. All other models support VTL oniSCSI and Fibre Channel.

This guide 9



Table 2 StoreOnce 2620, 4210, 4220, 4420, and 4430 models

Storage expansionPortsDescriptionProduct model

Not supported2 x 1GbE ports A single server with four 1TBdisks

HP StoreOnce 2620Backup, BB852A

One 12–disk expansionshelf

2 x 1GbE ports 2 x FC ports A single server with twelve1TB disks (see note below)

HP StoreOnce 4210Backup, BB853A (iSCSI)and BB854A (FC)


4 x 1GbE ports 2 x FC ports A single server with twelve1TB disks



2 x 1GbE ports 2 x 10GbEports 2 x FC ports

A single server with twelve1TB disks


Up to three 12–diskexpansion shelves

2 x 1GbE ports 2 x 10GbEports 2 x FC ports

A single server with twelve2TB disks


NOTE: The HP StoreOnce 2620 and 4210i support VTL on iSCSI only. All other models support VTL on iSCSI and Fibre Channel.NOTE: The HP StoreOnce 4210 iSCSI/Fibre Channel product is fitted with 1TB disks (the same

as the HP StoreOnce 4220 Backup system). However, the configured available disk capacity ofthe system is approximately 50% of this available disk capacity. The system cannot use the wholecapacity of the fitted disks because the product is not fitted with the required memory or processorto make use of the additional capacity.

With StoreOnce software version 3.11.3 and later, you can add StoreOnce 6500 couplets to aStoreOnce B6200 Backup system. This configuration is referred to as a mixed cluster configuration.

User types and user rolesUser roles

Two roles define the permissions associated with a user: admin and user . Two default user accounts,one for each role, are created automatically when the system is installed:• Administrator : This account allows authorized users to create and edit management and

StoreOnce functions via the GUI and CLI. The default login and password are Admin andadmin. The permissions role of the administrator is admin. You cannot delete this account,but you can and should modify its password. Note that once the administrator accountpassword has been changed, its password cannot be changed back to admin as this passwordis not sufficiently complex. The only way to revert that password back to admin is by usingthe HPresetpassword user account that is only available on the local console of the device.

• Operator : This account limits access to the GUI and CLI to monitoring and viewing. The defaultlogin and password are Operator and operator . The permissions role of the operator is user .

User types After installation, an administrator can configure additional user accounts and assign permissionsroles (administrator or user) and passwords to these users.There are three types of user accounts:• Local User (with an administrator or user permissions role): Local users log in locally.• External User (with an administrator or user permissions role): User logs in as a domain user.

An external user is a Microsoft Active Directory user.• External Group (with an administrator or user permissions role): An external user is a Microsoft

Active Directory group. Members of the group log in as domain users. If after creating a groupyou then set up a member of that group as an individual user (external user) and give them

10 Getting started



an administrator role, that user will be an administrator, even if the group role is set to user.This is because role permissions set through Add User take precedence over role permissionsset through Add Group.

Any user with an administrator role has the same permissions as the default administrator. Anyuser with a user role will have the same permissions as the default operator.

NOTE: To add external users or groups, first add the StoreOnce device to an AD domain.Connection to an AD Domain is configured through the NAS CIFS server tab on the StoreOnce

GUI. See “Adding the StoreOnce appliance to an Active Directory (AD) domain” (page 51).

IMPORTANT: If administrator credentials are lost, the administrator password can be reset throughthe hidden user account “HPresetpassword”. This account is password protected and is onlyaccessible from the StoreOnce console and CLI. HP recommends you change the HPresetpasswordpassword after installation and store it in an offline password security tool.

TipTo identify current user rights view the title bar of the GUI. This shows your user Type, Name, andRole. See (page 15) .

Network configurationThe StoreOnce Backup system must be configured on a network. See “Network configuration”(page 211) for details.For additional information about network configuration, please refer to the HP StoreOnce Backup system Installation and Configuration guide .

Power on and power offTo power on the appliance, you must perform a cold boot using the power on buttons on theappliance. You can shut down or reboot the appliance using either the StoreOnce CLI or theStoreOnce GUI. See “Maintenance” (page 210) for more information about using the StoreOnceGUI for additional power off options.If you need to troubleshoot powering on or off the appliance, see “Power On/Offproblems” (page 249).

Manually powering on the system (cold boot)Power on the server using the power on button on the front of the server to trigger a cold boot andautomatically power on.The normal boot sequence can take up to 10 minutes. On power on the HP StoreOnce Backupsystem runs its fans at high speed for approximately 10 seconds before returning to normal speed.

Network configuration 11



Location of power on buttons, HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup

Figure 1 Powering on the HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup system

Location of power on buttons, HP StoreOnce 2700, 4500, and 4700 Backup



12 Getting started




1. Power On button

Location of power on buttons, HP 2620, 4210/4220, and 4420/4430

Figure 5 Powering on the HP StoreOnce 4400 Series Backup system



1. Power On button

Power off using the CLI When powering off the HP StoreOnce Backup system make sure no backup or restore jobs arerunning or scheduled to run while the HP StoreOnce Backup system is offline

Various commands exist to shutdown an appliance. Please use the correct command to performthe task you require. More details can be found in the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI ReferencGuide .

Power on and power off 13



Some commands you might use:• system shutdown : This gracefully shuts down the appliance by shutting down all services

before powering down the server. This means when you power back up, the deduplicationstores will start up from a clean state. The server will be in the off state, and will requirepowering on via the power button or StoreOnce CLI.

• hardware poweroff : This uses the iLO port to turn off the server, which does not allowStoreOnce service sets to shutdown gracefully. This results in deduplication stores shutting

down in an unclean state and requiring integrity checking (an automatic process) on the nextpower on.

Rebooting the system using the CLI Various commands exist to reboot an appliance. Please use the correct command to perform thetask you require. More details can be found in the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide .Some commands you might use:• system reboot : This gracefully reboots the appliance by shutting down all services before

powering down the server. This means on reboot the deduplication stores will start up from aclean state.

• hardware reboot : This uses the iLO port to reboot the server, which does not allowStoreOnce service sets to reboot gracefully. This results in deduplication stores shutting downin an unclean state and requiring integrity checking (an automatic process) on reboot.

Navigating the HP StoreOnce Graphical User Interface (GUI)The HP StoreOnce GUI and CLI together make up the Management Console. While there is overlapin what operations you can perform, not all operations are available from both interfaces.The HP StoreOnce GUI is the main interface for:• Monitoring the status and health of the HP StoreOnce Backup system and all configured backup

devices• Creating and modifying VTL and NAS StoreOnce backup targets and StoreOnce Catalyst

stores• Managing replication relationships and housekeeping

To run the StoreOnce GUILog on to the StoreOnce GUI using a browser on any machine connected to the managementnetwork; see “User types and user roles” (page 10) for default login information. The HP StoreOnceBackup system uses a secure network connection.Enter:https://<IP_address> .

NOTE: Entering http: in the URL path will automatically forward to the https: secure networkconnection.

The StoreOnce GUI displays the Login prompt.

NOTE: The web browser requires Active Scripting or JavaScript enabled. If both are disabled,some browser buttons may not be displayed.

14 Getting started



GUI components

The GUI includes:• Title bar : Displays the HP StoreOnce Backup system model, the user name and role, and

contains the Logout and Help buttons.

NOTE: After 15 minutes of inactivity, the session times out and returns to the Login screen.

• System Status (top left side panel): Displays the last time the system was updated (the machine

time) and a count of event status categories.The three icons described below are used in the System Status area. They do not identify theevent that has affected the status. To view the individual events for more detail, select Eventsfrom the Navigator , as described in Events (page 226).

Indicates standard information.

Indicates a warning state. Attention is needed but the error is not critical to the successful operation ofthe device. For example, a single disk failure occurs or disks are installed in an expansion shelf butnot licensed.

Indicates a critical state. The system requires immediate attention. This icon may also appear in theDetails area of the screen with a red square background (rather than a red circle).

• Navigator (left side panel): Displays available GUI topics and enables navigation to selectedtopic pages. A + sign next to a topic indicates additional options; click + to expand theselection and click — to contract the selection.

• Topic page (main window): Initially, the main window displays the top-level StoreOnce topicpage. Select another topic from the Navigator to display the page for that selection. SomeTopic pages require selection of an item, such as a VTL library, NAS share, or StoreOnceCatalyst store in the top half of the page to display details specific to the selected item in thelower half of the page. Some Topic pages include multiple tabs within the page, for examplethe VTL—Libraries page. Select a tab to display information and actions appropriate to that

tab.Navigating the online help

The Help link in the top right-hand corner of each GUI page displays context-sensitive informationfor the current page.

The following example displays the Help when selected from the NAS Mappings page.

Navigating the online help 15



• Click and drag on a side or a corner to expand or contract the Help window.• The header displays the page where the help was called. Links navigate to the next or previous

pages; the titles of the next and previous pages are beneath the respective links.• The footer also provides navigation options. Select home to access the help Home page which

provides access to the complete online help and Contents, Search, and Index options. Resizethe page to view all of the content.

The StoreOnce CLIThe StoreOnce Command Line Interface (CLI) provides an alternative way of administering andmonitoring the system. Some tasks are only accessible from the StoreOnce CLI.

16 Getting started



StoreOnce CLI commands require an SSH client application (freely available from the internet) andmust be run from a SSH terminal session as described in Accessing the CLI (page 242).See the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide for more information about the StoreOnceCLI commands.

LicensingLicenses can only be applied from the StoreOnce CLI, as described in To apply a license (page 18) .

See also the HP StoreOnce CLI Reference Guide for more information.Licensing requirements for StoreOnce hardware products

There are two types of license:• Full license (not time limited)• Instant on or Demo (time limited to 90 days): This allows you to try out licensable functionalit

before paying for a full license for any of the features described below.The HP StoreOnce Backup system licensing requirements are:• All capacity expansion must be licensed. Each storage expansion kit contains a license that

must be loaded.HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup: The correct number of licenses for additional storage must beinstalled in the correct order. The 44TB Capacity Expansion Kit has a different license typefrom the 60TB Capacity Expansion Kit. The StoreOnce Backup system requires licenses to beinstalled in the following sequence: 5 x 44TB Capacity Expansion, 1 x 60TB CapacityExpansion, 5 x 44TB Capacity Expansion.

• No licensing is required for VTL or NAS emulations.• VTL and NAS replication requires a license on the target system.• StoreOnce Catalyst devices require a license for backup and for copy, so licenses must be

installed on both origin and destination systems.

• Security features (Data at Rest Encryption, Data in Flight Encryption, and Secure Erase) requira Security license.

Applying the Instant On licenseNOTE: The Instant On license is sometimes called the Demo license.

The Instant On license is available for all StoreOnce Backup systems and is a single license thatenables two features, StoreOnce Catalyst and StoreOnce Replication, for a period of 90 days.This allows customer to try some of the advanced features in StoreOnce units without having topurchase a full licence in advance. The license must be activated as described in the next section.

NOTE: This license does not include capacity expansion nor the Security Pack.To continue using these features, separate licenses must be purchased for StoreOnce Catalyst andReplication and applied within the Instant-On period. If they are not, data is not lost but:• Replication: Replication Target libraries will become read only.• StoreOnce Catalyst: Catalyst jobs will fail.

To apply an Instant On licenseUse StoreOnce CLI commands as follows:• license show to show the current license status

• license add demo to apply the 90–day license for all licensable features.Licensing 17



See the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide for more information.

To apply a full licenseFeatures that require a license include a license entitlement certificate with the hardware product.This is either an electronic document provided at purchase, such as Replication, StoreOnce Catalyst,Security (Data at Rest Encryption, Data in Flight Encryption, or Secure Erase), or a paper documentprovided with a capacity upgrade kit. The document contains all information required to obtain aunique License to Use (LTU) key. Obtain the key from the HP Licensing site by connecting to theweb address specified on the certificate and following the instructions. (Users without Internetaccess may use the contact numbers provided with the entitlement certificate.)You will be required to enter the product's serial number when requesting an LTU key.The number you should use is either the System ID that can be found on the Device Configurationpage of the GUI or the Serial Number that can be found on the Status page of the GUI. The HPlicensing portal accepts the UUID with, or without, the leading “hp”.Procedure 11. Obtain the unique LTU key as instructed on the License Entitlement Certificate. This is normally

from the HP Licensing website at http://www.myhplicensing.hp.com. HP recommends savingthe license to a .DAT file. The file can also be emailed to the registered license owner's emailaddress, or Cut and Paste to copy it to a temporary file.NOTE: A Quick Start guide to using the HP Licensing website is available from the Help linkat the top of the website page.

IMPORTANT: When redeeming licenses for replication and additional storage, HP Licensingwill ask you to provide a serial number. The number you should use is the System ID that canbe found on the Device Configuration page.

Do not use the warranty serial number that can be found on the server or tag attached to it. Always use the Serial Number as displayed in the StoreOnce GUI.

2. If you save the LTU as a file,sftp it into the HP StoreOnce Backup system'srepositorydirectory.• Using Linux

sftp Admin@<IP_address>

cd repositoryput <LTU>.dat

exit sftp

• Using a Windows sftp clientEnsure the File Protocol is set to SFTP, not SCP.Login to the StoreOnce GUI as Admin .Copy <LTU>.dat to repository .

3. Verify the LTU is stored within the repository using StoreOnce CLI command:system showrepository .Look for the<LTU>.dat file.

18 Getting started

http://www.myhplicensing.hp.com/

http://www.myhplicensing.hp.com/



4. Apply the license using one of the following StoreOnce CLI commands:• license load <LTU>.dat to load a license that has been saved as a file image. The

file image must exist in the Backup system'srepository directory.• license add <license key string> to key in the license directly. If you used

email or a temporary file, copy and paste the string exactly as obtained from the HPLicensing website. It is not advised to key in the LTU manually.

NOTE: The key is specific to the HP StoreOnce Backup system. It cannot be transferred.

5. To ensure that the license was applied successfully, run the StoreOnce CLI command:license show

Security featuresThe HP StoreOnce backup system offers the security features of Data at Rest Encryption, Data inFlight Encryption, and Secure Erase. They can be applied using a Security license.

Data at Rest Encryption When enabled, the Data at Rest Encryption security feature protects data at rest on a stolen,discarded, or replaced disk from forensic attack.Creation of a new VTL library, StoreOnce Catalyst store, or NAS share provides the option toenable encryption if the security features license was already applied. Once enabled, encryptionwill automatically be performed on the data before it is written to disk. Encryption cannot bedisabled once it is configured for a VTL library, StoreOnce Catalyst store, or NAS share.

When creating an encrypted VTL library, StoreOnce Catalyst store, or NAS share, the key storeis updated with the encryption key. This key store may be backed up and saved securely offsitein case the original key store is corrupted. However, keep only the latest version of the key storeas a backup. The key store on the StoreOnce Backup system is updated each time you create a

VTL library, StoreOnce Catalyst store, or NAS share. The StoreOnce CLI command that backs upthe key store also encrypts it, ensuring it can only be decrypted by the HP StoreOnce backupsystem.

NOTE: Each configured VTL library, StoreOnce Catalyst store, or NAS share uses a differentkey. The StoreOnce software automatically tracks which key is relevant to which device in the KeyStore File. Keys are automatically re-applied to the correct device if the key store file is restored.

IMPORTANT: Be very diligent about backing up your key store if you are creating encryptedstores or libraries. See the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide for more informationabout the StoreOnce CLI commands for backing up and restoring key stores.

Data in Flight EncryptionStoreOnce NAS or Catalyst backup, VTL or NAS Replication, or Catalyst copy can be encryptedat the Network layer using Data in Flight Encryption. When enabled, the Data in Flight Encryptionsecurity feature protects data that is in transit from forensic attack using the IPsec protocol. Thedata can be moving between two StoreOnce Backup appliances or a StoreOnce Backup applianceand a backup server.

NOTE: Data in Flight Encryption encrypts the data traffic to all the stores using that IP connectionTherefore, it may have an impact on performance.

Data in Flight Encryption is configured using thenet [add/delete] encryption commandsin the CLI; see the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide for more information.

Security features 19



Secure EraseSecure Erase can be enabled for all store types. This feature allows secure erasure of data thatwas backed up as part of a regular backup job. The Secure Erase feature can only be enabledafter store or library creation (edit the store or library to enable Secure Erase). All data written todisk once Secure Erase is enabled will be securely erased upon data deletion. For example, youmay have unintentionally backed up confidential data and need to be sure that it has been securelyerased. Work with the backup application to trigger the Secure Erase, for example by forcing theformat of a cartridge. The backup application sends the request to delete the data and the deletionis carried out as part of the Housekeeping function.

WARNING! To immediately remove data, ensure the backup application is configured correctly.Rotation and retention policies may need to be revisited to ensure that the data is expired.

NOTE: The Secure Erase process may take some time depending on the Housekeeping workload.

Only data chunks (processed portions of user data) not referenced by any other items can besecurely erased. If a data chunk is referenced by another item which is not marked for SecureErase, then the referenced data chunk will not be erased, securely or otherwise. It is recommendedto use the backup application when performing a Secure Erase on StoreOnce Catalyst stores, NAS

shares, or VTL libraries that have Secure Erase enabled.See “Licensing” (page 17) for information on how to apply the Security license for these features.

20 Getting started



2 StoreOnce functionsThe HP StoreOnce page is the initial page at logon. It provides important information about systemstatus and processes that are running. It also provides access to individual StoreOnce functions,which are available as sub topics (click + to display them in the Navigator).

NOTE: The StoreOnce Backup system must be configured on the network. See “Network

configuration” (page 211) for more information.For more information about network configuration, please refer to the HP StoreOnce Backup systemInstallation and Configuration guide .

Overview of the HP StoreOnce pageThe initial page at GUI logon provides important information about system status and processesthat are running (see System information and status (page 21)).It also provides access to individual StoreOnce functions, which are available as sub topics (click+ to display them in the Navigator).• VTL (Virtual Tape Libraries) functions (page 23)• NAS functions (page 43)• Replication functions (page 85)• HP StoreOnce Catalyst functions (page 115)• Housekeeping (page 143)• StoreOnce reporting (page 147) . This chapter covers the Activity and Reporting portions of the

GUI.

System information and statusSystem informationThis section provides information unique to an individual HP StoreOnce Backup system.Table 3 System information parameters

DescriptionParameter

The model of StoreOnce Backup system.Type

The name of the StoreOnce Backup system.Name

The serial number of the node. HP StoreOnce 2700, 2900, and 4500: Use this serialnumber when contacting HP Support. HP StoreOnce 4700 and 4900: This serial number

Serial Number

is for internal use only; it is not the serial number that should be used when contactingHP Support.

Overview of the HP StoreOnce page 21



Table 3 System information parameters (continued)


The software revision running on the StoreOnce Backup system.Software Revision

The IP addresses configured for the StoreOnce Backup system.IP AddressIf VLAN tagging has been configured on your network, there is an option to expand thelist so that you can see all the VLAN IP addresses that have been configured. For moreinformation about VLAN tagging, see your product’s HP StoreOnce Backup system

Installation and Configuration guide .

StatusThis section provides details about the rolled-up system status of the system and the status of theservices running.Table 4 Status parameters


The state of the system.Overall Status

The status of the background support processes such as EventManager andResourceManager.

StoreOnce Subsystem

The status of the VTL service. Virtual Tape

The status of the NAS service.NAS

The status of the StoreOnce Catalyst service.StoreOnce Catalyst

The status of the Replication service.Replication

The status of the Housekeeping service.Housekeeping

22 StoreOnce functions



3 VTL (Virtual Tape Libraries) functionsThe following topics are covered in this chapter:• VTL page (page 23)• Libraries page (page 25)• Make Replication Target libraries visible to the host (page 41)

Licensing requirements• No licensing is required for VTL emulations unless using the Security features Data at Rest

Encryption, Data in Flight Encryption, and Secure Erase.• VTL replication requires a license on the target site, but only if VTL replication is used.• Replication encryption using IPsec is part of the Security license but is enabled via the CLI.

See the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide .

VTL Configuration pageSelect VTL from the HP StoreOnce menu to display the current VTL configuration.The HP StoreOnce–VTL page includes the following tabs:• Fibre Channel Settings tab (page 23)• iSCSI Settings tab (page 25)

NOTE: Equivalent StoreOnce CLI commands are available for the tasks described in this section.See the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide .

Fibre Channel Settings tabIf your system supports a Fibre Channel interface, this tab is displayed as the default when youselect HP StoreOnce–VTL.Table 5 Fibre Channel settings

DescriptionSetting

StoreOnce 4900 and 4700: Four Fibre Channel ports are available.PortSee also Port assignment for StoreOnce Backup systems (page 24).StoreOnce 4500, 4210FC/4220, 4420/4430: Two Fibre Channel ports are available.Libraries can be configured to use the ports in various combinations. See Create alibrary (page 30) for more information.

This reflects the current status of each port, which may be OK, Warning, Error, or NotUsed. Warnings occur if the port is not available or is down. They also appear if the

Status

VTL Configuration page 23



Table 5 Fibre Channel settings (continued)

DescriptionSetting

system is unable to obtain Speed information. Errors occur if there is a fault or the systemcannot obtain the link status.

The default is Auto, which is the recommended option. The speed will be auto-negotiatedbetween the switch and StoreOnce appliance to choose the highest supported speed.

Speed

For users who wish to fix the speed, other values are available, as follows: 8Gbs(preferred), 4Gbs or 2Gbs (not recommended).

The default is N_Port, when a single target device creates many virtual devices on afabric attached port. N_Port requires the switch port to support NPIV (N_Port ID

Topology

Virtualisation). Private Loop mode is also supported, which is a direct connection betweenhost and StoreOnce appliance without a switch.

Individual ports can be “beaconed” via the GUI. This toggles an LED on the physicalHBA. The color of this button changes to show the current status of the beacon; grey isoff, blue is on. This column is not displayed in Edit mode.

Beacon

To edit Fibre Channel settingsUsers with an administrator login may edit these settings.

1. Click Edit to make the fields configurable for each port.

2. Make the preferred changes to the speed and/or topology, and click Update.CAUTION: This resets the Fibre Channel link and may affect any backup or restore jobsrunning.

NOTE: Fibre Channel settings apply to the whole appliance. The settings can also be editedin the StoreOnce Catalyst section of the GUI if you are backing up to StoreOnce Catalysttarget devices over Fibre Channel. Fibre Channel settings, defined on either page, apply toall target devices being backed up over Fibre Channel. Therefore, any changes here will alsoapply to StoreOnce Catalyst target devices over Fibre Channel and vice versa.

3. Click Continue at the warning prompt to continue applying the changes.

Port assignment for StoreOnce Backup systems with two Fibre Channel cards When creating a library you may select Fibre Channel ports individually (1, 2, 3, or 4) or combined(1 & 2; 3 & 4; or 1, 2, 3 & 4). Be aware that Port 1 and port 3 are on the first Fibre Channelcard, which is in slot 2; port 2 and port 4 are on the second Fibre Channel card, which is in slot3, so it is important to ensure that the system has been cabled correctly when connecting to theFibre Channel SAN. If you select one of the combined port options, both Fibre Channel cards mustbe connected.Drives can only appear on one port, so when you choose a combination of ports the drives areautomatically distributed evenly across the ports to ensure best performance and failover. After

24 VTL (Virtual Tape Libraries) functions



creating the library, it is possible to change the drive assignments using the edit function on theInterface Information tab for the selected library. See Interface information tab (page 33).

NOTE: Only StoreOnce 6500, B6200, 4900, and 4700 have two Fibre Channel cards andtherefore four Fibre Channel ports. StoreOnce 4500 has one Fibre Channel card and thereforetwo Fibre Channel ports. Older models do not support Fibre Channel.

iSCSI Settings tabBy default, a new library is automatically created whenever a new server first connects to the HPStoreOnce Backup system using the iSCSI initiator. Users with an administrator login may use thispage to disable this feature.Click Edit and make sure the Auto Creation Enabled box is unchecked.

Libraries pageClick VTL — Libraries in the Navigator panel to display existing libraries.The top half of the Libraries page shows all libraries configured for the appliance. Click on a libraryto display its details in the lower half of the page. Users with an administrator login may edit thesesettings and delete or create libraries.StoreOnce 4500, 4700, and 4900: VTL devices may be iSCSI or Fibre Channel libraries. StoreOnce2700, 2900, and VSA: VTL devices are iSCSI libraries only.The lower half of the Libraries page contains tabs that display information relevant to the selectedlibrary:• Device details tab (page 26)• Interface information tab (page 33)• Active Connections tab (page 35)• Cartridges tab (page 36)

Libraries page 25



Working with the Libraries list (top half of page)The Libraries list in the top half of the page provides up to 10 columns of details.• To sort the list according to a column, click on the column heading and select Sort Ascending

or Sort Descending.• To hide or show columns, click on any column heading, select Columns and uncheck or check

the preferred columns.• Users with an administrator login may also create libraries. Click Create.

See Create a library (page 30) for more information.• Users with an administrator login may edit details on some of the tabs for individual libraries

(not all tabs have editable information). The relevant GUI buttons are on the tab. For example,each Edit button shall trigger edit mode only for the current tab. When in edit mode, eachtab shall have its own Update and Cancel buttons. If a user changes tab while in edit modea warning dialog advises that any changes they have made will be lost.The Delete button is on the Device Details tab only and will delete the entire library.

Table 6 Libraries parameters (top half of page)

DescriptionParameter Identifies the selected device (library). HP recommends usnig a name that identifies thehost or backup job with which it is associated.

Name

The role of the library, which may be non-replicating, replication source or replicationtarget.

Replication Role

The status of the library, which may be online, offline, notstarted, failed to start, stopping,creating, or deleting.

Status

Indicates whether the library is connected. Possible values are: Connected – A clientdevice is connected to any device (robotics or drive) within this library. Not Connected– No device is connected to this library.

Connection

The emulation type used by the backup software. It is selected when you create a device.Device Type

The number of cartridges or slots available on the device, which is determined by theEmulation types for tape device selected when the device was created. You can reduce

Cartridges / Slots

the number of slots in the Device Details tab for a library selected on this page, but thiswill only remove the highest empty slots. Once it reaches a slot number that containsdata, it will not allow you to reduce the number further on this page, even if earlier slotsare blank. You must first use the Cartridges tab to make the slot empty.

Identifies the port to which the host is connected for backup and restore. The number ofports available in the drop-down menu depends upon the interfaces that your modelsupports and your network configuration.There is always one iSCSI port. StoreOnce 4900 and 4700 models only: there are fourFibre Channel ports available. When creating a library you may select individual drives

Port

or Fibre Channel ports 1&2 or Fibre Channel ports 3&4. Other Fibre Channel models

have two Fibre Channel ports and the option of using Fibre Channel port 1&2. Not allmodels support Fibre Channel.See also Port assignment for StoreOnce Backup systems (page 24) for importantinformation about cabling Fibre Channel ports and drive assignment.

The amount of user data stored on the library.User Data Stored

The actual size used on disk (after deduplication).Size On Disk

The deduplication ratio achieved on the data on the library. If deduplication is disabled,the column displays “Dedupe Disabled.”

Dedupe Ratio

Device Details tabThis tab displays device-specific information for the selected library.




Users with an administrator login may perform the following tasks from this tab:• Create a library (page 30)• Edit a library (page 31)• Delete a library (page 32)• Make Replication Target libraries visible to the host (page 41)

Table 7 Device Details tab

DescriptionField

Basic DetailsThe name used to identify a particular library. Enter a name that identifies the host or backupjob with which it is associated.

Library Name

The date the library was created is generated automatically.Creation Time

Identifies the port on the HP StoreOnce Backup system to which the device is connected.This will be the port used for the Library device as well as the default port for embedded

Media Changer Port

tape drives. The number of ports available in the drop-down menu depends upon theinterfaces that your model supports and your network configuration.There is always one iSCSI port.StoreOnce 4900 and 4700 models only: there are four Fibre Channel ports available.

When creating a library you can select Fibre Channel ports individually (1, 2, 3, or 4) orcombined (1 & 2; 3 & 4; or 1, 2, 3 & 4).Other Fibre Channel models have two Fibre Channel ports and the option of using FibreChannel port 1&2. Not all models support Fibre Channel.See also Port assignment for StoreOnce Backup systems (page 24) for important informationabout cabling Fibre Channel ports and drive assignment.

Enables deduplication if the check box is selected (default); unselect to create anon-deduplication library. Deduplication cannot be enabled or disabled once the library iscreated.

Deduplication

Enables encryption of data stored in the library. This feature requires a StoreOnce SecurityPack license before encryption can be enabled. Encryption cannot be enabled or disabled

Encryption Enabled

once a library is created; it can only be enabled at library creation. If enabled, encryptionis performed prior to writing data to disk for this library.

Enables Secure Erase. This feature requires a StoreOnce Security pack license before it canbe enabled. To enable, select the number of preferred Overwrite Passes for deleted data

Secure Erase Mode

(1, 3, 5, or 7 — The default selection of “None” disables secure erase). See “Secure Erase”(page 20) for information about the Secure Erase feature.

This quota is for the amount of data actually written to disk after deduplication. The minimumquota size is 50 GB. If the quota is enabled and the quota limit is reached, backups will

Physical Data SizeQuota

fail in order to prevent the quota from being exceeded. The quota allows you to partitionthe physical capacity of the appliance between various users.

Libraries page 27



Table 7 Device Details tab (continued)

DescriptionField

NOTE: If capacity management is required, HP recommends configuring backupapplications with quotas to reroute to another device or to postpone backups to preventbackups from failing unexpectedly.

When a library reaches its quota, the status of the library will change to “Critical”. Restoresfrom that library are permitted but new backups will fail. When the quota is no longer met,

either by increasing the quota or by expiring backups, the library status returns to the “OK”state.

This quota is for the amount of data a user sends to the device before deduplication. Theminimum quota size is 50 GB. If the quota is enabled and the quota limit is reached, backups

Logical Data Size Quota

will fail in order to prevent the quota from being exceeded. This allows you to provide aservice to back up a particular amount of user data. For example, set this when you chargecustomers per TB of user data protected.

NOTE: If capacity management is required, HP recommends configuring backupapplications with quotas to reroute to another device or to postpone backups to preventbackups from failing unexpectedly.

When a library reaches its quota, the status of the library will change to “Critical”. Restoresfrom that library are permitted but new backups will fail. When the quota is no longer met,either by increasing the quota or by expiring backups, the library status returns to the “OK”state.

Emulation

The emulation type of the library. The HP StoreOnce Backup system supports a number ofemulation types. . See also Emulation types for tape device (page 32). The emulation type

Library Emulation

determines the available embedded drives and cartridge slots. For example, if you selectHP MSL G3 Series (2x24), the device emulates an MSL 2024 Library with two embeddedtape drives and a possible total of 24 cartridge slots. Consult your backup applicationtechnical support information for information about device types they support.

The drive emulation type, HP LTO–2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, determines the default capacity of thenewly created cartridges within the library device and the inquiry string information provided

Default Drive Emulation

to the backup application. Tape cartridge capacities can be changed individually at anytime but cannot be reduced to smaller than the current used size.If you selected D2DBS Generic for the Library Emulation, Ultrium VT is an option for driveemulation. This is a generic Ultrium device which is clearly identifiable as virtual. Wheresupported by the backup application, HP recommends that D2DBS Generic and Ultrium VTare used in preference to the other emulation types.

All drives on a library configured with the IBM-TS3500 emulation type will use the IBM-LTO3drive emulation type. If the library is then changed to a different emulation type, the driveswill change to the default drive emulation type of LTO 4.If you edit this field, the new setting applies only to the next drives that are created withinthe library, it is not retrospectively applied to existing drives.

Define the number of cartridge slots in the library. The number of slots available dependsupon the Emulation Type selected. Each slot is automatically populated with a new cartridgeupon creation. The cartridge capacity corresponds to the Drive Emulation type.

Number of CartridgeSlots

The default number of drives is determined by the Emulation Type selected. If increasing thenumber of drives, DO NOT exceed the maximum number of libraries and drives that a host

Number of Drives

can physically access. The number of drives can only be edited during library creation fromthis field. After library creation, there is a separate button to Add/Remove drives.

The size of the cartridge in GB. This field is only available during creation of the cartridge.The default is 800 GB with options available from 10 GB to 3200 GB.

Cartridge Size

Enables the barcodes for the library to display six or eight characters. The HP StoreOnceBackup system generates barcodes automatically for cartridges. When entering a barcode

Number of BarcodeCharacters

manually, 8 characters are required. If the 6–character barcode is selected, the StoreOnceBackup system will truncate to the top six characters, removing the top two characters of an




Table 7 Device Details tab (continued)

DescriptionField

8–character barcode, i.e. barcode 1ABCDEFG will truncate to BCDEFG. The barcode isdisplayed with the truncated characters in brackets on the Cartridges tab, (1A)BCDEFG.

Enables configuration of the barcodes. A barcode is an 8– or 6–character, alpha-numeric,unique identifier for a cartridge within the HP StoreOnce Backup system. The backup

Barcode TemplateEnabled

application will normally track cartridges using barcodes but may also alias the cartridgewith another name in its database.By default, barcodes are generated automatically but may be determined by a barcodetemplate created when the library is created. If using barcode templates, the barcodetemplate:• Must be unique and must not start with the letters “CLN” or “DG” because these are

reserved designations for cleaning and diagnostic cartridges.• Can have a prefix of up to three alpha-numeric characters, a start value, and a suffix of

up to two alpha-numeric characters. Any unspecified prefix or suffix characters willincrease the length of the variable field of the barcode.

• Should be a minimum of 6 characters. Valid ASCII characters are A-Z, a-z, 0–9. Barcodesare always displayed as 8 characters with letters in capitals on the StoreOnce GUI andCLI (padded with space characters) regardless of the size selected. However, if theNumber of Barcode Characters is set to 6, only the rightmost 6 characters will be visible

to the backup software, i.e. barcode 1ABCDEFG will truncate to BCDEFG. (Truncatedbarcode characters are shown in brackets in the Cartridges tab.)You can modify the barcode template after library creation by clicking Modify BarcodeTemplate on the Device Details tab.

iSCSI Information

This is the Initiator Node Name of the host that will back up to this device. You must enterit manually when you are creating a new device. If you are using the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator,

iSCSI Initiator Name(iSCSI devices only)

you can find the name by running the iSCSI Initiator on the host and copying the InitiatorNode Name from the General tab.

Check this box if you require the initiator to logon. You must also provide the Initiator CHAPuser name and secret.

Require initiator to logon

This should be the same CHAP user name that you configure for the target on the iSCSIInitiator. (On the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, this is the User Name as it is configured on theTargets tab in the Log On to Target Advanced Settings.)

Initiator CHAP UserName

This should be the same CHAP secret that you configure for the target on the iSCSI Initiator.(On the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, this is the Target Secret as it is configured on the Targetstab in the Log On to Target Advanced Settings.)

Initiator CHAP Secret

Check this box if you require mutual CHAP authentication, which means that the target mustalso log on to the initiator. You must also provide the target CHAP user name and secret.

Target required to logonto initiator

On the iSCSI Initiator you must also make sure that mutual authentication is enabled. (Onthe Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, make sure Perform mutual authentication is checked on theTargets tab in the Log On to Target Advanced Settings.)

This may be any meaningful CHAP user name. It does not need to match any informationon the iSCSI Initiator.Target CHAP User Name

This should be the same CHAP Secret that you configure for the target on the iSCSI Initiator.(On the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, this is the Secret as it is configured from the General tab.)

Target CHAP Secret

Library Usage

The backup application primarily used to backup to this library. This optional, butrecommended, field is provided to assist with support troubleshooting and has no impacton performance or deduplication efficiency.

Backup Application

The type of data being protected by the backups to this library. This optional, butrecommended, field is provided to assist with support troubleshooting and has no impacton performance or deduplication efficiency.

Backup Data Type

Libraries page 29



NOTE: iSCSI multi-initiator mode is not supported.

To create a new library (administrators only)HP recommends:• Only configure the libraries that you need• Only configure the number of cartridges that you are likely to need

You can add cartridge slots at a later date to expand the system and remove individual blankcartridges from a library without deleting the whole library.1. To create a new library device for the host, click Create in the upper left corner of the screen.2. Enter the appropriate information; see Device details tab (page 26).

To enable Data at Rest or Data in Flight Encryption for the new library, configure it at this timeby checking the Encryption Enabled box. This feature requires a license. If the license is notinstalled, an information message is displayed next to the check box stating Not Licensed. See“Security Features” (page 19) and “Licensing” (page 17) for more information.

NOTE: The Replication Wizard does not allow creation of an encrypted target library. If areplication target library needs encryption enabled, you must create the library on the targetappliance before replication mapping to it.

3. Click Create. The Cartridges tab is only generated after the library is created. The informationon the Interface Information tab is generated automatically.

NOTE: Once the library has been created, you can enable Secure Erase. See “Edit alibrary” (page 31) for more information.

Guidelines on creating librariesThe tables below illustrate maximum configurations for libraries and drives, but this number maybe limited if you have already created NAS shares and StoreOnce Catalyst stores.Table 8 Maximum number of libraries and drives (StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700, and 4900)

HP 4900HP 4700HP 4500HP 2900HP 2700

505032248Max libraries

50050012812832Max drives perlibrary

1638440964096102496Max slots perlibrary (D2DBS)




Table 9 Maximum number of libraries and drives (StoreOnce 2610, 2620, 4210, 4220, 4420 and4430

HP 4420, and HP4430

HP 4220HP 4210iSCSI/FCHP 2620 iSCSIHP 2610 iSCSI

50321684Max libraries

500128643216Max drives perlibrary

4096409610249696Max slots perlibrary (D2DBS)

To edit library details (administrators only)It is possible to edit some, but not all, device details after creating a library.• Delete cartridges by reducing the number of slots on the Devices page. This will only remove

the highest-numbered empty slots. Once the Delete operation reaches a slot number thatcontains a cartridge, it will not allow further reduction on the Details page, even if previousslots are empty. To open previous slots first use the Cartridges tab to delete the cartridge fromthe slot.

• Changing the cartridge size (by changing the emulation type) on this page will only changenewly-added cartridges; it does not change the size of cartridges that were already created.

• You can reduce the number of drives but, if you go to 0, the port setting will change to "NoPort".The Number of Drives field can only be edited during library creation. After library creation,there is a separate button to Add/Remove drives.

• You cannot change the library type to a type that has a smaller set of maximum values (e.g.number of cartridges) than is currently set.

• You cannot enable or disable deduplication.•

Once the library is created and the correct license is applied, the Secure Erase Mode boxappears on the Device Details tab. The selection box defaults to None, meaning Secure Eraseis disabled. To enable Secure Erase, select the preferred number of Overwrite Passes (1, 3,5, or 7). If enabled, this feature allows you to securely erase confidential data that may haveunintentionally been backed up as part of a regular backup job. See “SecurityFeatures” (page 19) and “Licensing” (page 17) for more information.

To edit library details:

Libraries page 31



1. Select the device in the list to display its details and then click on Edit.

CAUTION: Take care if you change the Port configuration because the system does notautomatically reassign any drives that may now be configured incorrectly. A Warning isdisplayed. For example, if you change from the Fibre Channel Port 1&2 to a single FibreChannel Port, when the status shows ready and restarted, you must manually correct thosedrives that are connected to the wrong port, using the Interface Information tab. See Interfaceinformation tab (page 33).

2. Amend details as appropriate and click Update to apply them.To add/remove drives1. Click Add/Remove drive.2. The maximum number of drives is shown, below which you can edit the Number of Drives.3. Click OK . If you provide an invalid value the text box will be surrounded in a red border.

To delete a library (administrators only)Select the required device and then click Delete on the Device Details tab to delete it. You will beprompted to confirm deletion.

WARNING! All data on the device will be deleted. The library's deduplication store is also deleted.It may take some time to delete all the files and free space on the HP StoreOnce Backup system.If Secure Erase is enabled for this store, this data will be deleted securely.

Emulation types for tape devicesHP StoreOnce Backup systems emulate a range of physical tape devices listed in Emulation types.Table 10 Emulation types for tape devices

DescriptionEmulation type

A tape library device that allows you to configure up to 500 drives and up to 4096 cartridgesper library. These values relate to the HP StoreOnce 4700 and 4900 Backup system, butnote that the HP 4900 supports 16384 cartridges per library.

D2DBS Generic

If supported by your backup application, this is the preferred emulation type because it doesnot emulate any physical library types in existence and is, therefore, clearly identifiable asa StoreOnce device. It is the most flexible emulation type available; however, backupapplication support varies by software vendor.If you have selected D2DBS Generic for the Library Emulation Type, you will be able toselect Ultrium VT for the drive emulation. This is a generic Ultrium device which is clearlyidentifiable as virtual. Backup application support for Ultrium VT is common, but not quiteas complete as the D2DBS library type, so its not possible to use it with all backup software.




Table 10 Emulation types for tape devices (continued)

DescriptionEmulation type

NOTE: Symantec prefers their customers use this emulation type with BackupExec andNetbackup.

An enterprise tape library solution that allows you to configure up to 500 drives and up to4096 cartridges per library (HP 4900 = up to 16384 cartridges per library).

EML E Series

An enterprise tape solution that allows you to configure up to 500 drives and up to 4096cartridges per library (HP 4900 = up to 16384 cartridges per library).ESL E Series

A tape library device that appears as a native IBM TS3500 device in a TSM environmentto allow use of standard IBM drivers. The emulation type is configured at the library level.

IBM-TS3500

Therefore, all drives on a library configured with the IBM-TS3500 emulation type will usethe IBM-LTO3 drive emulation type. If the library is then changed to a different emulationtype, the drives will change to the new emulation type.

A tape library device with a maximum of two embedded Ultrium tape drives and 24 cartridgeslots. It should be used when implementing rotation schemes which involve simultaneousbackup jobs to two devices. This emulation type is widely supported by backup applications.

MSL G3 Series (2x24)

A tape library device with a maximum of four embedded Ultrium tape drives and 48 cartridgeslots. It should be used when implementing rotation schemes which involve simultaneous


backup jobs to more than two devices or those that use a large number of cartridges devices.This emulation type is widely supported by backup applications.

A tape library device with a maximum of eight embedded Ultrium tape drives and 96cartridge slots.


Flexible emulationThe ESL, EML and D2DBS emulations are particularly flexible because they allow you to configua large number of drives per library. The main benefits are that a large number of drives allows:• more concurrent streams on backups which are throttled due to host application throughput,

such as multi-streamed backups from a database.• a single library (and therefore deduplication store) to contain similar data from backups thatmust run in parallel to increase deduplication ratio.If using these flexible emulation types, the following factors should also be considered:• An important consideration when configuring VTL devices is that the library and each drive

that you configure for it counts as a separate device. There are practical limitations on thenumber of devices that each host and Fibre Channel switch or HBA can access.For iSCSI VTL devices, a single Windows or Linux host can only access a maximum of 64devices. A single library with 63 drives is the most that a single host can access. Configuringa single library with more than 63 drives will result in not all devices in the library being seen(which may include the library device). The same limitation could be hit with multiple librarie

and fewer drives per library.• The total device value also applies to NAS shares and StoreOnce Catalyst stores. If you

configure the full value as VTL devices, you will not be able to configure any NAS shares orStoreOnce Catalyst stores for that appliance.

Interface Information tabThis tab shows interface information for the media changer and drives on the selected library.The information for the Interface Information tab is generated automatically and manual configurationis discouraged.However, you may use this tab to adjust the port to which a drive has been assigned; see To

change drive assignment (page 35).Libraries page 33



The following information is provided for a device that is configured to use the Fibre Channelinterface.

NOTE: It does not matter how many ports a device is configured to use; there is only one columnfor FC Address, World Wide Port Name, and Number Of Logins. Devices configured on multipleports have a list of the format “[Port Label]: [Value]” in these columns.

Fibre Channel interfaceTable 11 Fibre Channel Interface Information

DescriptionField

Lists all of the devices for the specific Library. There are entries for the Media Changer andfor each of the drives configured.

Device Name

The device status (not the state of the connection): Offline, starting, stopping, onlineStatus

Defines the Fibre Channel port to which each media changer or drive is connected. Seealso To change drive assignment (page 35).

Port

A unique serial number for the device. It is generated automatically by the HP StoreOnceBackup system and cannot be edited.

Device Serial Number

The Fibre Channel addresses of the device. This will show an address for each FC Port forwhich the device is configured, or "Down" if the port is not connected.

FC Address

Provided when the device is created and is globally unique. You can change this, if necessary,but not to any names used by libraries or drives on the local appliance.

World Wide NodeName

Generated automatically by the HP StoreOnce Backup system and used for Fibre Channelzoning for Fibre Channel devices. You can change this, if necessary, but not to any names

World Wide Port Name

used by libraries or drives on the local appliance. Libraries split across multiple ports havemultiple entries in this field.

Fibre Channel libraries show the number of logins for each device in the library. Librariessplit across multiple ports have multiple entries inthis field.

Number of Logins

iSCSI interfaceThe following information is provided for a device that is configured to use the iSCSI interface.

Table 12 iSCSI Interface Information

DescriptionField

The device name lists all of the devices for the specific Library. There will be an entry for theMedium Changer, and for each of the drives configured.

Device Name

The device status (not the state of the connection): Offline, starting, stopping, onlineStatus




Table 12 iSCSI Interface Information (continued)

DescriptionField

iSCSI potPort

This is a unique serial number for the device. It is generated automatically by the HPStoreOnce Backup system and cannot be edited.

Device Serial Number

This is provided when the device is created. World Wide NodeName

This is generated automatically by the HP StoreOnce Backup system for iSCSI devices.iSCSI Target Name

This is generated automatically by the HP StoreOnce Backup system for iSCSI devices.iSCSI Alias

To change drive assignment on Fibre Channel ports When creating a library, drives are automatically assigned based upon the specified portconfiguration. If you select a pair of ports, the drives are distributed equally across both ports. Tochange drive assignment:1. Click Edit.2. For each configured drive, select the required port from the drop-down list.

3. Click Update.IMPORTANT: Be aware that Port 1 and port 3 are on the first Fibre Channel card, which is inslot 2; port 2 and port 4 are on the second Fibre Channel card, which is in slot 3, so it is importantto ensure that the system has been cabled correctly when connecting to the Fibre Channel SAN.

Active Connections tabThis shows the Session information of any active connections to the library; it displays informationabout open iSCSI sessions. All details are generated automatically and cannot be edited.If a device is showing as not connected, this indicates that the iSCSI Initiator on the host has notlogged on. Log on using the iSCSI Initiator and set the device as a Persistent Target for that hostto ensure that it will automatically log on again whenever the host is rebooted.Table 13 Active Connections details

DescriptionField

Shows the name of the device.Device name

Shows the iSCSI initiator name of the client connected to the device.Initiator name

Shows the short iSCSI initiator alias of the client connected to the device. (This may notbe provided in which case a dash is shown.)

Initiator alias

Session IDSID

Connection IDCIDChecksum checking on iSCSI headers — this is configured on the client.Header digest

Checksum checking on iSCSI Data — this is configured on the client.Data digest

Libraries page 35



Cartridges tabThis tab shows cartridge information for the selected library.Users with an administrator login can perform the following tasks from this tab:• Create a cartridge (page 37)• Delete a cartridge (page 37)• Write protect a cartridge (page 38)• Edit maximum cartridge size (page 39)• Move or unload a cartridge (page 39)• To edit barcodes in bulk (page 40)

Table 14 Cartridge tab parameters

DescriptionField

Identifies each element of the library available to hold a cartridge. The types of elementsare:

Location

• Mail slot: a dedicated slot used to hold a cartridge that is ready for exporting to orimporting from physical tape. The Mail slot is not used with HP StoreOnce models.

• Tape drive: populated when there is activity on a cartridge. You can move a cartridgeinto a tape drive by using the Move Cartridge drop-down menu in Edit mode.

• Slot n: one of the standard library slots.

A barcode is an 8– or 6–character, alphanumeric, unique identifier for a cartridge withinthe HP StoreOnce Backup system. See Device Details tab (page 27) for barcode information.

Barcode

Check box indicates whether the slot is included in a replication mapping configuration. Itcannot be edited from this page.

Mapped Slot

The actual used capacity in MB or GB.Used Size

Defaults to the appropriate capacity for the drive emulation type selected on the Devicestab. This value may be changed if the Used Size is Blank, see below. The maximum valueallowed is 3200 GB.

Max Size

Check box that enables (checked) and disables (unchecked) write protection, see “Writeprotect a cartridge” (page 38) .

Write Protected

Identifies when the cartridge was last written to and is useful when identifying data forcopying or exporting.

Last Written

NOTE: Additional columns appear when function buttons are selected below, such as Create,Move, and Delete.




Empty slotsEmpty slots are slots containing no cartridges and all the fields are empty.• Tape drive row: A library consists of two devices: a tape drive and changer device. This

location refers to the tape drive element of the library and is normally only populated whenthe backup application on the host is writing to or reading from the library.

• Mail slot row: This location is the slot used for importing and exporting cartridges from alibrary. It is provided by StoreOnce virtual libraries for compatibility with backup applicationsbut is not used.

• Numbered slot row: This slot is empty after a Delete operation or after the backup applicationhas moved data to the mail slot for export.

Once a numbered slot is empty, the Create button may be used to create a new blank cartridge.

To create a cartridge (administrators only)

NOTE: You can only create a cartridge in an empty slot.

Click the Create button. In the Add Cartridge column, empty slots are checked.Select individual slots by clicking the appropriate check boxes. After selected the slots wherecartridges should be added, click Create.

Alternatively, click Create all to create a blank cartridge of the size/emulation type selected whenthe library was first configured in all empty slots.

• If you create a cartridge in an empty slot, the backup application must inventory it (add it toits database or catalog) before the backup application can access the cartridge.

• If you create a cartridge in an empty mail slot, use the backup application to move the blanknew cartridge to an empty cartridge slot without requiring an inventory. This saves processingtime.

Restart the backup application services to see the new cartridges.

To delete a cartridge (administrators only)To delete individual cartridges, select individual slots by clicking the appropriate check boxes inthe Delete Cartridge column. Then click Delete.

Libraries page 37



CAUTION: A dialog is displayed, warning that all data will be lost and asking you to confirmthe Delete action.

NOTE: You cannot delete cartridges that are currently in drives, that are mapped for replication,

or that are in the delete pending, erase pending, or creating state.If you click Cancel, the cartridges will not be deleted and you remain in delete mode. Click Deleteto continue and the selected cartridges will be deleted. The GUI does not differentiate betweencartridges with data and blank cartridges.

NOTE: You can also delete cartridges by reducing the number of slots on the Devices page, butthis only removes the highest slots with no or blank cartridges. Once the Delete operation reachesa slot number that contains a cartridge with data, it will not reduce the number further on the Detailspage even if earlier slots are blank. First use the Cartridges tab to reconfigure the slots to a blankstate.

To delete all or a range of cartridges (administrators only)To delete all the cartridges in the library at once, click Delete All. This opens a window with severaloptions:• Delete — Remove cartridges (default): completely deletes the cartridges• Erase — Erase cartridge data: deletes the data but leaves the cartridge configurations intactYou can also determine which cartridges to delete or erase:• All Cartridges• Range: enter the first and last slot to be included in the delete or erase.Finally, if you select the “Delete cartridges with data” check box, cartridges containing data willbe deleted. If unselected, only blank cartridges are deleted. After all of the options are selected,click OK . A confirmation box appears; click OK .

NOTE: You cannot delete cartridges that are currently in drives, that are mapped for replication,or that are in the delete pending, erase pending, or create state.

To write protect a cartridge (administrators only)1. Click Edit for the selected library.




2. Check the Write Protected check boxfor the cartridge(s).

3. Click Update. Your backup application will not be able to write any more data to thecartridge(s).

To edit maximum cartridge size (administrators only)The Max Size defaults to the appropriate capacity for the drive emulation type selected on theDevices tab, but this value is editable. The maximum value allowed is 3200 GB.

NOTE: The maximum size indicates the maximum amount of user data that can be written to thatcartridge, assuming uncompressed data; it will only be committed when data is written to it.Changing the maximum space does not affect actual disk usage or save disk space but may beuseful if you know you will be moving data to a physical tape with a smaller cartridge capacity.

1. Click Edit for the selected library.2. Select a value from the drop-down menu, and click Update.

To move or unload cartridgesYou can move cartridges, but only to an empty Location (tape drive or numbered slot).• Click the Move button. The Move Cartridge drop-down menu lists available empty slots. (Empty

numbered slots are created when a cartridge is deleted.)• Use the Unload all Cartridges button to return all cartridges to default slots.

Libraries page 39



The move and unload options may be useful to re-align the library configuration against the backupapplication. For example, if the backup application has crashed or if the backup application doesnot support the Move Medium command, the library and the backup application can become outof sync.

NOTE: You cannot move or unload cartridges that are in the delete pending, erase pending, orcreate state.

To edit barcodes in bulk After a library is created, the Edit Barcodes button appears at the bottom of the cartridges tab forthat library. This feature allows the barcodes of a batch of cartridges within the library to bechanged according to a user defined template which may contain a fixed prefix and/or suffixvalue and a variable portion.

NOTE: All characters within the barcode must be alpha-numeric (A-Z, 0–9). All alphabeticcharacters will be capitalized upon application (regardless of how they are entered).

The values chosen for prefix, suffix, and starting value will limit how many barcodes can begenerated. For example, if you enter a 3 character prefix and 2 character suffix, you are limitedto 3 alpha-numeric characters for the variable portion which limits the total number of barcodesto 46656 barcodes if the starting value for the variable portion is 000. Note that if 6 characterbarcodes are selected, the uppermost characters of the barcode will not be reported to the backupapplication; these may be part of the barcode prefix specified.To edit barcodes:1. Click the Edit Barcodes button.2. In the Batch Update Barcodes dialog box, configure the following:

• First Slot: Defines the number of the first slot in the library that will be with the batch.

• Last Slot: Defines the number of the last slot in the library that will be updated with thebatch.• Prefix: Defines the first letter or numerical value for the barcodes. Accepts up the three

characters.




• Start Value: Defines the numerical value of the first barcode variable field.• Suffix: Defines the suffix letter or numerical value for the barcodes. Accepts up to two

characters.

After configuring the barcode fields, if red outlines appear on the Prefix, Start Value, or Suffixboxes, then an error occurred. Change the values inside the indicated box or boxes. Mouseover a red outlined box and a note pops up explaining the error. Clicking OK without clearing

the indicated errors prompts a pop-up window that references validation errors in the form,and the barcode update is not be applied.3. Once all fields are correctly configured, click OK . The new barcodes are applied to the

cartridge slots that were chosen for update.Barcode things to note:• A barcode template cannot be applied to a range of slots with one or more empty slots.• A duplicate barcode detected within the service set prevents the barcodes from being updated.

The check stops at the first duplicate barcode rather than continuing to search for additionalduplicates.

• A barcode template results in restricted barcode prefixes of CLN or DG being created.

Make Replication Target libraries visible to the hostNOTE: See Replication functions (page 85) for more details on replication configuration.

Replication Target libraries are not normally visible to the host, but you can configure devices tomake them visible to backup applications. This allows the backup application to:• Move cartridges from storage slots to drives in the library.• Perform read and verify operations on the cartridge (but not write).• Perform load/unload operations on the tape device.

Make Replication Target libraries visible to the host 41



WARNING! Use with care. If the backup application can see both source and target libraries,the application cannot distinguish between the source library and the target library because thebarcodes are duplicated in the two locations.

Why make target libraries visible?It may be useful to make a target library visible to the backup application on the host to:•

Confirm replication is working correctly and check the integrity of the replicated backup bydoing a test restore.• Perform manual tape copy jobs (sometimes called tape offload) to any tape device on the

network using the backup application.

IMPORTANT: You cannot change data on a Target library cartridge; you may only load ittemporarily into a physical tape device to read it.

Best practices for using this feature

WARNING! Failure to follow best practices may cause instability and damage to your backup

system and data. Cartridges can be marked as unusable or the backup application can attemptto write to target cartridges.

• Verify no replication jobs to the selected target cartridge are in progress.• Verify no backup jobs to the mapped source cartridges are scheduled.• Verify the backup application media server instance to be used is not within the same

cell/domain that can access the source cartridge.• Import the data on the target cartridge into the backup application (this operation must be

repeated after each replicate operation to the cartridge).• Perform the desired operation on the cartridge, which may be:

Verify the cartridge using the backup application either with a verify command or byperforming a restore.

◦

◦ Copy the cartridge to a physical tape device connected to the media server.

How is a target device made visible?1. Create the replication mapping as normal. See Running the replication wizard (virtual tape

devices) (page 99), as appropriate.2. From the host that has access to the target library on the VTL — Libraries page, select the

target library in the Libraries list.3. Click Edit.4. The Port defaults to None. Select the appropriate Fibre Channel or iSCSI Port.5. Click Update.6. Make the target library visible from other hosts. Configure the Fibre Channel fabric to make

the host visible. Target visibility persists even if the power fails or if the replication mappingis removed.

NOTE: To remove target visibility, reset the Port to None.




4 NAS functionsThe following topics are covered in this chapter:• NAS server configuration: See “NAS server configuration page ” (page 43)• NAS share configuration: See “NAS share configuration page” (page 61)

Licensing requirements• No licensing is required for NAS emulations unless using the supported security features,

Secure Erase and Encryption of Data at Rest.• If NAS replication is used, a license on the target site is required

NAS server configuration pageSelect NAS from the StoreOnce menu to display the NAS configuration page.Two tabs allow configuration of a CIFS server or an NFS server for the shares. Only users with an

Administrator role can change the NAS server configuration.

• CIFS server tabThe CIFS Server provides CIFS interface shares that provide backup targets to Windowsservers. See “CIFS server tab” (page 44).

◦

◦ The authentication mode (None, User or Active Directory [AD]) for the CIFS Server canbe configured on this tab.

◦ The network (IPv4 or IPv6) over which the CIFS Server will authenticate can be chosenon this tab.

NOTE: This selection is just the protocol used for authentication with the AD server andhas nothing to do with either data transfer or appliance management networks. However,

the AD server address must be reachable using one of the configured subnets.

NAS server configuration page 43



• NFS server tab

NFS Shares are provided as backups targets for UNIX and Linux servers. For detailedinformation about NFS server configuration settings, see “NFS server tab” (page 59).

◦

◦ The host list that will be authorized to access the NFS server and corresponding sharescan be added on this tab.

CIFS server tabTo use the NAS CIFS shares, there are three configuration stages when creating a backup targetshare that Windows users can access.1. Configure the authentication mode for the StoreOnce CIFS server using the StoreOnce GUI.

These settings will apply to all NAS CIFS shares created on the server. To configureauthentication mode, see:• “Configuring None authentication mode” (page 45)

• “Configuring User authentication mode” (page 45)• “Configuring AD authentication mode” (page 50)

2. Create NAS CIFS shares on the HP StoreOnce Backup System using the StoreOnce GUI orthe StoreOnce CLI:• To use the HP StoreOnce GUI: See “Create CIFS shares” (page 64)• To use the StoreOnce CLI: See the HP StoreOnce Backup System CLI Reference Guide .

44 NAS functions



3. Define access rights to the NAS CIFS share. Do one of the following:• Set up local user accounts on the StoreOnce appliance and give them access rights to

the share.• Give active directory users access to a share using Microsoft Management Console in

Windows.

Configuring None authentication mode

None authentication mode provides a simple CIFS server configuration that allows for the creationof shares with no authentication. Any user or computer can mount and access the shares createdon the HP StoreOnce Backup system with this setting. This is the default authentication mode forthe CIFS server where all the Shares configured have its Permission disabled. Because this modeis default, there is no user action required to activate this mode.

Configuring User authentication modeUser authentication mode provides a method of securing the CIFS shares to be accessed only byspecified users with local account credentials configured on the StoreOnce appliance. Once theCIFS server is configured to User mode, it is possible to create new local users by selecting CreateUser .

1. Select NAS on the StoreOnce Web Management Interface2. Select CIFS Server tab. This tab displays the CIFS authentication configuration.3. Click Edit to modify the authentication settings.4. Select User authentication mode.




5. Click Update. A pop up window will advise that “If you update the CIFS server settings, anybackup or restore jobs in progress for it will fail. Are you sure?”

6. After reading the advisory, click Continue (or Cancel).7. The system is now configured to use CIFS NAS shares with specified local users.

NOTE: You do not need to set the network type.

IMPORTANT: When switching authentication modes, the user must log out and the log back into the Windows client before the new authentication settings will work.

46 NAS functions



Create a local user on the StoreOnce CIFS server1. On the CIFS server tab, select Create User .

2. Provide a user name and password.




3. Click Update. Your user will be added to the list of users in the lower pane of the CIFS server tab.

4. Navigate to HP StoreOnce NAS Shares to provide individual users access to specific shares.

User name and password recommendationsUser name recommendations:• Can be a maximum length of 64 charactersPassword recommendations:• Must be at least 8 characters long• Special characters can be used:

The password can comply with the Windows strong password requirement to include uppercase

letters (A,B,C) or lowercase letters (a,b,c) or numbers (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9) or symbols (` ~! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ - + = { } [ ] \ | : ; " ' < > , . ? / ).

Change a local user password from the StoreOnce CIFS server1. On the CIFS server tab, select the user. The user name will be highlighted.

48 NAS functions



2. Click Edit.

3. Enter the local user new password and click Update to save the new password.

Delete a local user from the StoreOnce CIFS server1. Navigate to the CIFS server tab.




2. Select the user to be deleted (the name will be highlighted), and click Delete.

3. A prompt to confirm the deletion of the local user will pop up. Click OK (or Cancel).

4. When you click OK, the user is removed from the system.

Configuring AD authentication mode AD authentication mode provides a method of securing the CIFS shares to be accessed only byspecified users or groups within an Active Directory domain to the CIFS Server. To grant external

Active Directory users or groups access to NAS shares:1. Set the StoreOnce appliance authentication mode to Active Directory (AD) and add the

StoreOnce appliance to AD domain: See “Adding the StoreOnce appliance to an ActiveDirectory (AD) domain” (page 51).

2. Manage StoreOnce CIFS shares within an AD domain: See “Configure and Manage StoreOnceCIFS share access within an AD domain” (page 66).

3. Assign AD users administrator roles for the StoreOnce CIFS server: See “Assigning AD usersas administrators for the StoreOnce CIFS server” (page 54).

50 NAS functions



4. Assign AD groups administrator roles for the StoreOnce CIFS server. See “Assigning ADgroups as administrators for the StoreOnce CIFS server” (page 58)

5. Leave AD domain. See “Leaving the AD domain” (page 59).

IMPORTANT: In order to allow Active Directory users the log into the Appliance GUI or CLI toperform management tasks, you first need to configure the CIFS server settings to AD.To use external Active Directory users or groups on the StoreOnce Backup system (using the GUIor CLI function) to perform management tasks, first use the NAS CIFS server tab to set the

Authentication mode to AD, join an AD domain, and assign any required delegated users orgroups. This is required even when not using NAS shares as target devices. The external usersand groups are created in the Active Directory domain controller.

When granting access to external user or groups to the management GUI and CLI , it is advisableto use the same Active Directory server across all couplets in the cluster rather than unique ActiveDirectory servers for each couplet.

Prerequisites• Domain Name• Domain Controller running:

Windows server 2003◦

◦ Windows server 2003 R2

◦ Windows server 2008

◦ Windows server 2008 R2

◦ Windows server 2012

◦ Windows server 2012 R2• A user account on Domain Controller, which should be the Domain Administrator or delegated

user with Domain Administrative rights• A user account on server running DNS to add entries• The system time on the HP StoreOnce Backup system must be correct and in sync with that of

the domain controller. Use the StoreOnce CLI time commands on the HP StoreOnce Backupsystem to synchronize with a time server ensures accurate time keeping. See the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide for details.

Adding the StoreOnce appliance to an Active Directory (AD) domain

IMPORTANT: Joining or leaving the domain will result in failure of any backup or restoreoperations that are running. Do not perform this procedure if you have active backup or restoreoperations running.1. Select NAS on the StoreOnce GUI.




2. Select the CIFS server tab. This tab displays the CIFS authentication configuration.

3. Click Edit to modify authentication settings.

IMPORTANT: You must manually create an entry for the StoreOnce appliance in the DNSserver so the appliance can be resolved using its domain qualified appliance name. TheStoreOnce appliance will not automatically add itself to the DNS server configuration (given)during the network configuration process. Please do this important step first before joining thedomain.

4. Select AD authentication mode.

5. Enter the domain name to which you want the CIFS server to join.

6. Select whether the Network Type of the AD domain server (management network) is IPv4 or

IPv6. This defines the network protocol over which the Active Directory authentication requestis sent.

52 NAS functions



7. Click Update. A pop up window will advise that “If you update the CIFS server settings, anybackup or restore jobs in progress for it will fail. Are you sure?”

8. After reading the advisory, click Continue (or Cancel).9. An Active Directory Registration window will pop up and request the credentials of a user

with permission to join the domain. Provide the credentials (<Domain Username> and<Password>) or the domain user with the appropriate permission level to add a computer (inthis example, that is the StoreOnce appliance). The user is typically the Domain Administratoror a delegated user with Domain Administrative rights. Click Register .

10. After a short delay ( the time is dependent on the topology and size of the AD Domain), thecomputer (appliance) will become a member of the domain and a Success dialog box isdisplayed. Click OK .You will be presented with the CIFS server AD status page.




NOTE: Local Administrators are domain users that can be delegated to manage the CIFSServer of the StoreOnce appliance. See “Assigning AD users as administrators for theStoreOnce CIFS server” (page 54).

11. NOTE: Do this next step from a Windows server that is used to perform domain configurationor from a PC with the Microsoft "Remote Server Administration Tools" installed.

Launch the “Active Directory Users and Computers” management tool (typedsa.msc fromthe command line or launch from Administrative Tools) and verify that there is an entry for theStoreOnce device CIFS server

Assigning AD users as administrators for the StoreOnce CIFS server After adding the StoreOnce device to the AD domain, a new Local Administrators section appearson the lower half of the CIFS server tab. This allows the addition of domain users or groups withadministrative privileges to the CIFS server. This section provides a way of implementing Delegated

Administration, which is not available for the StoreOnce device from the Active DirectoryManagement tool.

54 NAS functions



IMPORTANT: When adding AD domain users as local administrators through the CIFS servertab, the users are automatically created as Local Administrators whether or not they are Administratorusers on the AD domain.

1. On the CIFS server tab, to add a user, click Add User or Group.

2. Under Members, enter the Domain User who will manage the StoreOnce CIFS server as an Administrator.




3. Click Update.

IMPORTANT: The user is added using the AD logon name. This is available from the useraccount information. Select the domain user from the domain controller, go to its Propertiesmenu page, and check the domain user account information. The following example showsthe AD logon name of cifssuperadminuser1.

56 NAS functions



Both user logon formats are accepted (for example, <domain_user@domain> or<domain\domain_user>). The user will be resolved against the domain controller database.

If a user is not configured, or has already been added to the list, an error will be given.NAS server configuration page 57



Assigning AD groups as administrators for the StoreOnce CIFS server1. On the CIFS server tab, to add a group, click Add User or Group.

2. Enter the credentials of the Domain group who will manage the StoreOnce CIFS server asadministrators and click Update.

58 NAS functions



Removing AD users or groups as administrators for the StoreOnce CIFS server1. Select the user or group that requires deletion from the list of Local Administrators. The user

or group will be highlighted.

2. Click Delete.3. To request confirmation of the deletion, a pop up screen will ask, “Are you sure you want to

delete the selected member?” Click OK .The user is deleted from the list.

Leaving the AD domainYou may wish to leave an AD domain in order to:• Temporarily leave, then rejoin the same domain.• Join a different AD Domain.•

Put the StoreOnce Backup system into either No Authentication or Local User Authenticationmodes.Click the Leave AD on the NAS—CIFS Server GUI page to leave. You can then rejoin the samedomain. If joining a different AD domain or changing modes, click the Edit button on the pageand select the new domain or mode.

NFS server tabTo use the NAS NFS shares, there are two configuration stages when creating a backup targetshare that UNIX and Linux servers can access:• Configure NFS server hosts that can mount the NFS shares. See “Configuring NFS server

hosts” (page 59).• Create NAS NFS shares on the HP StoreOnce Backup System:

To configure using the StoreOnce GUI: See “Create NFS shares” (page 74).◦

◦ To configure using the HP StoreOnce CLI: See the HP StoreOnce Backup System CLI Reference Guide .

Configuring NFS server hosts1. Log on to the StoreOnce GUI for the appliance.2. Select NAS.




3. Select the NFS server tab.

4. Click Add.5. Provide a Host Name (required) and Description (optional).

NOTE: A host with the ‘*’ wildcard, added by default, allows any host to access a share.You can have a maximum of 1000 hosts on the NFS server (including the wildcard).

6. Click Update. The new server host is added to the Host List.

60 NAS functions



Format of host namesLimited to 99 characters

Format of description fieldLimited to 83 characters

NAS share configuration pageThe NAS share configuration page is used to view and manage all NAS target devices (shares)for both CIFS and NFS servers.

IMPORTANT: It is important to understand that the HP StoreOnce network share is intended tobe used ONLY by backup applications that “back up to disk”. Do not use the NAS target deviceas a drag-and-drop general file store. The one exception to this rule is when using the NAS shareto seed an appliance for replication.

List of sharesThe top pane of the Shares page displays all configured shares (both CIFS and NAS) and providesa summary of the different constants of the shares.

Table 15 Share information details

DescriptionItem

The name that is used to identify the share configuredNameThe role of the share, which may be non-replicating,replication source, or replication target

Replication Role

The status of the share, which may be online, offline, notstarted, failed to start, stopping, creating, or deleting

Status

CIFS or NFS Access Protocol

The amount of user data stored on the shareUser Data Stored

The actual size used on disk after deduplicationSize on Disk

NAS share configuration page 61



Table 15 Share information details (continued)

DescriptionItem

The deduplication ratio achieved on the data on the share.If deduplication is disabled, the column displays DedupeDisabled.

Dedupe Ratio

Date/Time the share was createdCreated

The last time the share has been modifiedLast Modified

Create NAS sharesUsers with an administrator login can create NAS shares. The process varies slightly dependingupon whether a user is creating a CIFS or an NFS share.• To create CIFS shares: See “Create CIFS shares” (page 64)• To create NFS shares: See “Create NFS shares” (page 74)Table 16 NAS share configuration

DescriptionItem

The name that will be used to identify the share in WindowsName A text description of the share (optional)Description

CIFS or NFS Access Protocol

Shares can be configured as version 2 (default) or version1. The primary difference is in the maximum number of

Share Version

files per share permitted: 25,000 for version 1 shares and1,000,000 for version 2 shares. In addition, version 2shares have been optimized to improve performance withCommvault backup software. Configuring a version 1 shareis only recommended for replication compatibility withanother appliance on an older software version that onlysupports version 1 shares. Once configured, you canchange the share version from 1 to 2 but you cannotchange from 2 to 1. The maximum number of sharesdepends upon the product model and the number of otherdevices (including VTL libraries and StoreOnce Catalyststores) already created. See “StoreOnce keyparameters” (page 257) .

The network path to access the configured shareNetwork Path

The number of files on the share. This information is alsoavailable as a column at the top of the Shares page but is

Number of Files

hidden by default. Click any column heading to configurewhich columns display.

The number of directories on the share. This information isalso available as a column at the top of the Shares pageNumber of Directoriesbut is hidden by default. Click any column heading toconfigure which columns display.

Used to prevent further backup to the share. If enabled,any backup jobs currently using that share will fail.

Write Protection

Indicates if deduplication is enabled.Deduplication Enabled

Indicates if encryption is enabled. This feature requires theSecurity License. See “Licensing” (page 17).

Encryption Enabled

This quota is for the amount of data actually written to diskafter deduplication. If the quota is enabled and the quota

Physical Data Size Quota

limit is reached, backups will fail in order to prevent the

62 NAS functions



Table 16 NAS share configuration (continued)

DescriptionItem

quota from being exceeded. The quota allows you topartition the physical capacity of the appliance betweenvarious users (and users with a better deduplication ratiocan store more data).

NOTE: If capacity management is required, HPrecommends configuring backup applications with quotasto reroute to another device or to postpone backups toprevent backups from failing unexpectedly. When a NASshare reaches its quota, the status of the share will changeto “Critical”. Restores from that share are permitted butnew backups will fail. When the quota is no longer met,either by increasing the quota or by expiring backups, theshare status returns to the “OK” state. If you use this featurein conjunction with Client-Permissions to control a client’saccess to the share, you can effectively define how muchspace a particular user is allowed to use on the HPStoreOnce Backup system. With many users using the samesystem, this allows you to control how much disk space isavailable to individual users.

This quota is for the amount of data a user sends to thedevice before deduplication. If the quota is enabled andLogical Data Size Quota

the quota limit is reached, backups will fail in order toprevent the quota from being exceeded. This allows youto provide a service to back up a particular amount of userdata. For example, set this when you charge customersper TB of user data protected.

NOTE: If capacity management is required, HPrecommends configuring backup applications with quotasto reroute to another device or to postpone backups toprevent backups from failing unexpectedly. When a NASshare reaches its quota, the status of the share will changeto “Critical”. Restores from that share are permitted butnew backups will fail. When the quota is no longer met,either by increasing the quota or by expiring backups, theshare status returns to the “OK” state. If you use this featurein conjunction with Client-Permissions to control a client’saccess to the share, you can effectively define how muchspace a particular user is allowed to use on the HPStoreOnce Backup system. With many users using the samesystem, this allows you to control how much disk space isavailable to individual users.

Indicates if Secure Erase is enabled. This feature requiresthe Security license. See “Licensing” (page 17).

Secure Erase Mode

The backup application used on the system. This optionalfield is provided to assist with support troubleshooting andhas no impact on performance or deduplication efficiency.

Backup Application

The type of data being protected by the backups. Thisoptional field is provided to assist with support

Backup Data Type

troubleshooting and has no impact on performance ordeduplication efficiency.




Create CIFS sharesEach share has a Permissions tab. The options available on this tab depend on the type of

Authentication mode selected when the CIFS Server is configured.• If None (No Authentication) was selected, the Permissions tab is disabled.• If User Authentication was selected, there will be a list of users. Set the access permissions for

that share for each user in the list to Access or No Access (default). See “Configuring User authentication mode” (page 45).

• If AD Authentication was selected, share permissions are managed from the AD Domain. See“Configuring AD authentication mode” (page 50).

To create a CIFS share using the GUI1. Navigate to the StoreOnce NAS — Shares page.

2. Click Create. Provide the share details as described in Table 16 (page 62) .

64 NAS functions



3. Click Create to proceed with share creation. It will take a few minutes for the status of the newshare to go Online.Once the share is configured, the status will be Online.

To create a CIFS share using the StoreOnce CLISee the HP StoreOnce Backup System CLI Reference Guide .

Configure CIFS share with None authentication modeFor None authentication, there is no further configuration required. Proceed to mounting the shareon your Windows client.Configure CIFS share with User authentication modeIf the CIFS server has been configured for User authentication, select the share in the Shares list todisplay the Permissions tab and see the list of users available on the server who can be assignedaccess to NAS target devices. You can amend permissions for individual NAS target devices.1. Select the NAS share for which permission needs to be altered and select the Permissions tab

and click Edit.




2. Assign Access or No Access for each of the local users for the share by selecting the respectivebutton and click Update.

3. A pop up screen will advise that’ “If you update the Share settings, any backup or restorejobs in progress for it will fail. Are you sure?” Click Yes.

4. After a few minutes, the share will be updated with the new access permissions.

Configure and Manage StoreOnce CIFS share access within an AD domainNow that the HP StoreOnce Backup system is part of a domain and can be managed it is possibleto grant access permission to the shares for domain account users or groups. (See “Adding theStoreOnce appliance to an Active Directory (AD) domain” (page 51) for more information.)The StoreOnce GUI advises the same: “CIFS Authentication is managed through Active Directory”.There are two ways for AD domain users to be granted access permissions to the NAS shares onthe CIFS server:• As remote users configured through the Windows Computer Management tool: Run MMC

and install the computer management plug-in (management console). Once remote users areconfigured through the windows computer management tool (which must be run through theMicrosoft Management Console), permissions can be applied per share using the StoreOnceGUI.

• As local users with delegated Administrator permissions configured through the HP StoreOnceGUI. These users have Administrator rights to all shares created on the NAS CIFS server. See“User Management” (page 199).

NOTE: The StoreOnce appliance only supports the Shared Folders utility within the WindowsComputer Management. Any other Windows Computer Management utilities are not supported.

66 NAS functions



Grant AD domain uses access to NAS shares using the Windows Computer Management tool1. From the Windows client, open the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) through Start Run

mmc.

2. From the menu, browse through FileAdd/Remove Snap-in.

3. The Add/Remove Snap-ins screen is opened. Browse through the list of Available Snap-insand search for Shared Folders.




4. Select the Shared Folders snap-in.

5. Click Add to move the snap-in to Selected snap-ins, and click OK .

68 NAS functions



The Shared Folders screen will open.

6. Select the Another Computer button and enter the fully qualified domain name of the StoreOnceappliance. This can also be done by clicking Browse and searching for the object.




7. In the View section of the screen, select the Shares button. Complete the snap-in configurationby clicking Finish.

8. Click OK to complete the snap-in addition.

70 NAS functions



The snap-in is now added to the MMC console. This can be saved for future management ofthe StoreOnce appliance configured shares.

9. Expand the Shares list to see the shares configured on the StoreOnce appliance.

10. Select the share you want to assign domain users or groups to access. Right-click on the shareand select Properties.




The Share Properties screen will open. A new share created will have no users or groupsassigned to it.

11. Select the Share Permissions tab and click Add.

72 NAS functions



12. Enter the domain user name to be added. Verify by the domain user name by clicking CheckNames. Once the user is verified, click OK .

13. Assign the permission you want the domain user to have for this share.




14. Click OK to confirm the changes.It is now possible to access the newly created share from any Windows server on the domain usingthe credentials of anyone who has permission to access the share. If a permitted user is loggedinto Windows, access to the share is granted automatically with those permissions.

IMPORTANT: When switching from None or User authentication mode to AD authenticationmode, HP recommends that the user logs out and back into the Windows client where the shareis mounted. This ensures the new authentication settings of the CIFS server are enforced.

NOTE: The HP StoreOnce Backup system does not support creating shares from WindowsComputer Management Consoles. Shares must be created from the StoreOnce Web ManagementInterface or CLI.

Create NFS shares

To create NFS shares using the GUI1. Navigate to the StoreOnce NAS —Shares page.

74 NAS functions



2. Click Create. Provide the share details as described in Table 16 (page 62) .

3. For NFS shares, you will need to change the access protocol from CIFS to NFS.




4. Click Create. It will take a few minutes for the status of the new share to go Online.Once the share is configured, the status will be Online.

To create NFS shares using the StoreOnce CLISee the HP StoreOnce Backup System CLI Reference Guide .

Assign hosts permissions for shares1. Select the NFS share for which permission needs to be altered.

76 NAS functions



2. Select the Permissions tab and click Edit.

3. Assign the hosts(s) that are to access the NFS share the appropriate access level, No Access,Read-Only Access, or Read-Write Access. An access level needs to be assigned for every hostaccordingly as required for the share by selecting the respective radio buttons. Click Update.

4. A screen will pop up, advising that, “If you update the Share settings, any backup or restorejobs in progress for it will fail. Are you sure?” Click Yes.

After a few minutes, the share is available. The respective hosts now have their assignedaccess level to the configured NFS share.




Root Squash and Secure Ports configuration for hosts At this time, when editing Permissions, you also have the option to disable two additional items:

• Root Squash: By default, root_squash is enabled when NAS NFS stores are created. Thissquashes the root permissions for the client so that it is not possible to access or create fileson the NFS server as root; the client always has non-root user permission. Users can disableNFS root_squash after a NFS store has been created and gives a client permission to accessor create files on the NFS share as root user.

IMPORTANT: Unless “root” permission is required, do not disable root_squash (by untickingthe checkbox), as it can make the system insecure.

• Secure Ports: By default, secure ports are enabled when NAS NFS shares are created. Bydefault you can connect on the port below 1024 for NFS (Privileged ports). Disabling SecurePorts allows connection to the ports higher than 1024 for NFS.

IMPORTANT: Unless required to connect to ports higher than 1024, do not disable SecurePorts.

Edit NAS share detailsSome items to note about editing NAS share details:• Users with an administrator login may edit the Description, Write Protection, and Secure Erase

settings for existing NAS shares. Write protection prevents access initially or protects dataafter it has been backed up for compliance purposes.

• Data at Rest Encryption and Data in Flight Encryption cannot be edited; those features areonly enabled or disabled at the time of share creation.

• If the correct license was applied, you will be able to enable Secure Erase by selecting thenumber of Overwrite Passes from the Secure Erase Mode drop down box. This field does notappear until after the share is created.

• You can change a share from version 1 to version 2, but you cannot change from version 2to version 1. In addition, you cannot change from version 1 to version 2 if replication mappingis in place; you must first remove the replication mapping, ensure both the source and targetdevices are on StoreOnce software version 3.11.0 or higher (upgrade if necessary), changethe source and target shares to version 2, and then reapply the replication mapping.

• You cannot change the share name after it is created. If a share is converted from Read/Writeto Read Only, any open items will be forced closed, which may result in inconsistencies ifthey are being written to by a backup application. The user will be warned that this couldoccur before the change is made.

• The Network Path tab is not available for when you select Edit. However, if you display theNetwork Paths tab, you can copy the share path if required. If your StoreOnce Backup system

78 NAS functions



is configured on a Virtual LAN, this tab will display all the VLAN IP addresses available forthat share.

Delete NAS sharesUsers with an Administrator login may delete a share. Select the share in the list and click Delete.

Using CIFS shares under WindowsThere are several ways to access the NAS CIFS target device from a Windows server on thenetwork.

Access a share in Windows Explorer1. Open Windows Explorer.




2. Enter one of the following as the share path:\\<StoreOnce Server name>\<Share Name>

\\<IP Address of StoreOnce Server>\<Share Name>

NOTE: To use the StoreOnce server name, the appliance needs to have its name and IP Address resolvable in the DNS queries of the network. The DNS needs to be configuredthrough the networking configuration of the StoreOnce appliance.

Mounting a share through command linenet useNet use is a windows command line utility allowing to mount the share. Refer to the Windows helpfor further information to use this utility.

• For None authentication use one of the following commands:

net use z:\\<StoreOnce Server Name>\<Share Name>◦

◦ net use z:\\<IP Address of StoreOnce appliance>\<Share Name>/user:<username>

80 NAS functions



• For User or AD authentication use one of the following commands:

◦ net use z:\\<StoreOnce Server Name>\<Share Name>/user:<username>

◦ net use z:\\<IP Address of StoreOnce appliance>\<Share Name>

Mounting a share using Map Network Drive Windows utilityYou can use this process for shares with None, User, and AD Authentication.




1. Open Windows Explorer and open the menu for Computer (right click on Computer ). SelectMap Network Drive.

2. Enter the CIFS share network path.

82 NAS functions



3. To set authentication mode:• None: Click Finish. The share will be mounted under the drive letter selected.• User and AD: A Windows Security screen will pop up. Enter the user name and password

of the user to access the share.

Using NFS shares under UNIX or Linux environmentsConnecting NAS shares to UNIX or Linux

To access the NAS share from a UNIX or Linux server on the network, use the mount command.The actual syntax of the command depends on the operating system.

IMPORTANT: See the HP StoreOnce Backup System Linux and UNIX Configuration Guide formore detailed information. Verify the correct mount options to ensure good performance anddeduplication ratio. These options may be different from normal use.

Problems connectingThe following sequence causes problems when connecting to an NFS share:1. Creating an NFS share and mounting it on a Linux box.2. Deleting the share on the StoreOnce Backup system without unmounting it from the Linux box3. Recreating the share again using the same name.




In this scenario, the Linux client assigns a new set of inodes to the new share, but when trying toaccess the old mount point uses the previous set of inodes and cannot connect. Reboot the hostLinux system and the connection will work again.

Best practices for mounting an NFS shareUse the -o forcedirectio or the -o sync option when configuring an NFS share to preventissues with “out of order delivery”. See the HP StoreOnce Backup System Linux and Unix Configuration Guide .

NOTE: NOTE: The sync patches require an rpm update of the operating system before the-osync or -o forcedirectio mount options can be specified.

Option VersionOperating system

–o sync mount option10SLES

–o sync mount option11

–o sync mount option5RHEL

–o sync mount option6

-o forcedirectio option11iv2HP-UX-o forcedirectio option11iv3

-o forcedirectio option9Solaris

-o forcedirectio option10

-o forcedirectio option5.3 AIX

-o forcedirectio option6.1

-o forcedirectio option7.1

Use the wsize and rsize mount options to specify NFS mount size. The recommended buffer sizeis 65536 for both parameters.mount<RemoteNFSShare><LocalMountPoint> -o "sync,wsize=65536 rsize=65536"

NOTE: The backup application needs to be configured to at least twice (2x) the size of the NFSmount wsize & rsize buffer or more. Hence, in the above example, set the backup applicationblock size to 128K or more

84 NAS functions



5 Replication functionsSelect Replication from the StoreOnce menu item to display all aspects and tasks associated withreplication.There are four tabs on the main Replication page and two further Navigator options for configuring

VT mappings and NAS mappings. The Status tab is the default.

Users with an administrator login can create mappings and configure replication. Operators canuse this page to view replication settings.Replication settings• Status tab (page 86)• Partner Appliances tab (page 87)• Local Settings tab (page 92)• Event History tab (page 95)Replication mappings• VT Mappings (Replication) (page 97)• Recovering a source appliance, VTL devices (page 103)• NAS Mappings (Replication) (page 105)• Recovering a source appliance (NAS shares) (page 111)Replications actions are applied and monitored at appliance level. For a definition of an appliance,see What is an appliance (page 85) .

NOTE: With the current version of the software there are no equivalent CLI commands availablefor the tasks described in this section.NOTE: A license is required for replication on the target appliance.

What is an appliance?Replication can take place between different models of StoreOnce Backup systems. The GUI refersto both Replication Targets and Sources as appliances, so it is important to understand the differentmeanings of “appliance” across the product models.• In a StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700, and 4900, the appliance is the physical device

or server that contains the data to be replicated. All mapping is done using the physical IPaddresses of the target and source StoreOnce Backup systems.

• In a StoreOnce VSA, the appliance is the virtual device or server that contains the data to bereplicated. All mapping is done using the IP addresses of the target and source StoreOnceBackup systems.

• In a StoreOnce 6500 and B6200, the appliance is the Service Set that contains the data tobe replicated. This means that each StoreOnce 6500 or B6200 Backup system has at leasttwo Service Sets that can be selected as appliances. (A fully expanded HP StoreOnce 6500or B6200 Backup system would have eight Service Sets.) All mapping is done using the virtualIP addresses of the target and source Service Sets.

What is an appliance? 85



How do I identify the IP address of a StoreOnce appliance? When configuring replication between different models of StoreOnce Backup systems, be awarethat:• Replication targets on a StoreOnce 26xx, 2700, 2900, 42xx, 44xx, 4500, 4700, and 4900

Backup system require the IP address of the appliance.• Replication targets on an StoreOnce VSA Backup system have two virtual NICs supported,

meaning you can have a maximum of two IP addresses for the VSA.• Replication targets on a StoreOnce 6500 or B6200 Backup system require identification of

the Data VIF IP address of the appropriate Service Sets (also referred to as a node). Each HP6500 and B6200 Backup system may have up to eight Service Sets (the minimum is twoService Sets).

NOTE: Service Set Data VIF IP addresses are used for data traffic and are not the same asthe Cluster Management IP address used to log onto the HP StoreOnce Management Console.You cannot configure the replication targets using the IP address used to log on to the HPStoreOnce Management Console.

To identify the appliance IP address from the HP StoreOnce GUI

1. Open the HP StoreOnce GUI. The GUI opens on the appliance landing page.2. The IP address of the appliance is listed in the left-hand corner of the main page.

Status tab

The top half of the Status tab contains information about replication throughput and active sessions.• Replication Throughput Totals: These tables show an average throughput over a period time,

so they will not produce accurate data right away.• Active Sessions: This identifies the number of source and target jobs that are running, and the

number of source appliances that are connected. This information is useful when monitoringperformance.

The bottom half of the Status tab contains a list of Active Jobs. Click and highlight any of the status

details to display more information about the job.86 Replication functions



Partner Appliances (Replication)The Partner Appliances tab displays the replication status of all Target and Source HP StoreOnce

Backup systems configured for use with this HP StoreOnce Backup system.There are three tabs:• Target Appliances tab (page 88)• Source Appliances tab (page 89)• Source Appliance permissions (page 90)The bottom half of the page displays information about any blackout windows that apply to theselected appliance.

Partner Appliances (Replication) 87



Target Appliances tabThis tab allows you to view the details of all target appliances. Users with an administrator logincan use the tab to:• To add a target appliance (administrators only) (page 89)• To edit or remove a Target Appliance (administrators only) (page 89)• Run Traceroute (page 89)

NOTE: Although administrators can add Target Appliances on this page, it is not necessary todo so before mapping configurations because this option is also available when running theReplication wizard.

Summary appliance details and target appliance parametersThe following status details are shown for both Target and Source appliances.Table 17 Summary Appliance details

The name of the appliance. Appliance Name

The health of the appliance; this shows you whether the appliance is running or not. Appliance Status

The IP address of the appliance. Appliance Address

The serial number of the appliance.Serial Number

The amount of free space on the appliance.Free Space

Whether the appliance is online or not.Online

The protocol of the appliance software.Protocol Version

Click on an appliance to view more detailed status information in the bottom half of the screen,as described in the following table.Table 18 Target appliance parameters

Target Appliance tab (some fields are editable).

The name that is used to identify the Target Appliance. You specify it on the Local Appliancetab of the partner appliance.

Appliance Name

The product class of the appliance.Product Class

The IP address of the Target Appliance. You specify it when you add the Target Applianceand can edit it later.

Appliance Address

The serial number of the Target Appliance; it cannot be edited.Serial Number

The port number that will be used for command protocol.Command Protocol PortNumber

The port number that will be used for data protocol.Data Protocol PortNumber

Indicates whether the Target Appliance is available or not. Available

Identifies the replication protocol in use.Replication Protocol

The amount of user data stored on the Target Appliance.User Data Stored

Shows the capacity of the Target Appliance.Capacity

Shows the amount of free space on the Target Appliance.Free Space

Shows the software version of the Target Appliance.Software Version

Shows the current system time.System Time

88 Replication functions



Table 18 Target appliance parameters (continued)

Shows whether a blackout window is currently active or not. This means that no replicationwill occur.

Blackout Window Active

Any blackout windows that have been specified will be reflected in this weekly calendar.During these times, the selected Target Appliance is not available for replication.

Blackout Windows

Administrators may edit and delete blackout windows from here or from the Local Settingstab.

To add a target appliance (administrators only)1. Click Add Target Appliance.

Figure 8 Create new target appliance

2. Enter the Target Appliance Address.3. The default values for the Command and Data Protocol Port Numbers cannot be changed. If

replication needs to take place through a firewall, the network administrator must open (TCP)ports 9387 (Command Protocol) and 9388 (Data Protocol).

4. Click Add Target Appliance.

To edit or remove a Target Appliance (administrators only)• Select the appliance and click Edit to edit the Appliance Name, IP address, and protocol port

details of the target appliance.• Select the appliance and click Delete to remove an appliance from the list of Target Appliances

available to that source.

Run TracerouteClick Run Traceroute to verify the local appliance can communicate with the target appliance andidentify the number of hops and latency in the routing.

Source Appliances tabThis tab displays the details of all source appliances.If the HP StoreOnce Backup system also has Replication Target libraries, there may be multipleSource Appliances.

NOTE: Source Appliances are appliances that have added the local appliance or Service Setas a Target Appliance. Only Source Appliances currently connected to the Target Appliance arelisted.

The Source Appliances tab is not editable.




Table 19 Source appliance parameters

Source Appliance tab (no fields are editable).

The name of the Source Appliance. Appliance Name

The product class of the appliance, such as HP B6200 or HP 4430.Product Class

The IP address of the Source Appliance. Appliance Address

The serial number of the Source Appliance.Serial Number

Indicates whether the Source Appliance is available or not. Available

The amount of data stored on the Source Appliance.User Data Stored

Shows the capacity of the Source Appliance.Capacity

Shows the amount of free space on the Source Appliance.Free Space

Shows the software version of the Source Appliance.Software Version

The day of the week and local time (in 24 hour time) of the system. The system time is setusing the CLItime commands; see the HP StoreOnce Backup System CLI Reference Guide for details.

System Time

Any blackout windows that have been specified will be reflected in this weekly calendar.During these times, the selected Source Appliance is not available for replication.

Blackout Windows

The throttling (bandwidth limiting) setting. See “Bandwidth Limiting tab” (page 93) for details.Throttling (Kbps)

Source Appliance Permissions tabSource Appliance Permissions are disabled by default. In this state, there is no control over mappingbetween share and library devices on the Target and the Source Appliances.This tab contains an Enabled check box that, when selected, allows administrators to lock the abilityto create share and library mappings. When the Replication wizard is run and mappings areconfigured, the Target will only have access to a list of sources that are allowed to replicate to it.

The tab also incorporates a wizard that becomes active when an administrator adds a new sourceappliance to list, as described in the procedure below.

To configure access permissions to source appliances (administrators only)1. Click Edit and check the Enabled box.2. Click Update.

A wildcard entry in the Source Appliances list allows configuration of permissions across allsource appliances. However, this does not set permissions for individual appliances.




Table 20 Source Appliances parameters

The serial number for the required Service Set. This information can be found on thetop-level HP StoreOnce page.

Serial Number

The name of the appliance for which you have specified the serial number and cannotbe altered.

Appliance Name

The status of the appliance for which you have specified the serial number and cannotbe altered.

Appliance Status

The address of the appliance for which you have specified the serial number andcannot be altered.

Appliance Address

Indicates whether any mappings have been configured on the source appliance. Thisis important because any mappings that already exist will be retained regardless of

Configured Mappings

any access permissions you subsequently set up for libraries and shares on thatappliance.

3. Click Add. A wizard prompts the necessary steps to add a new source appliance to the list.Provide the serial number of the appliance and specify initial access permissions for all librariesand all shares on that appliance.




4. Once the appliance is added to the list of Source Appliances, permissions can be configuredfor it.

To configure permissions (administrators only)1. Select the source appliance in the list. There are two tabs; one for Libraries, and one for

Shares.2. Click Edit. Check the Access box for those shares and libraries to which access should be

granted. These are the shares and libraries that will be displayed when the mappingconfiguration step is run in the Replication wizard. It will not be possible to create a new shareor library from the wizard.

3. Click Update to apply the permissions.

Local Settings (Replication) tabThis tab contains three additional tabs that show the settings for the local HP StoreOnce Backupsystem:• General Settings tab (page 92)• Bandwidth Limiting tab (page 93)•

Blackout Windows tab (page 94)General settings tab

Users with an administrator login may edit and maintain these settings. Other users may only viewthem.1. Select the General Settings tab.

2. Click Edit to make the fields editable. See Table 21 .3. Click Apply to apply the settings.Table 21 General Settings (Replication)

The name of the appliance, its current status, and the product class. You can only edit theappliance name. The default name is the network host name of the appliance (as configured

Appliance

at installation). You can change this to something more user friendly and easier to identifythe appliance on the Management Console of the local and partner appliances. The namecan be anything meaningful to the user, such as the geographical location of the appliance.The Appliance Supported Protocol Version shows which versions of replication protocol are




Table 21 General Settings (Replication) (continued)

supported, so in the unlikely event of incompatible versions it will be visible to the user.Replication auto negotiates to the lowest supported protocol on either end.

The maximum number of source and target jobs that can run concurrently. If running backupsat the same time as replication, the default value of target jobs can be reduced to avoid

Maximum Jobs

using too much WAN bandwidth and overloading the target appliance and reserve applianceperformance.

An event is generated each time a mapping goes out of sync and goes back into sync. Thisfield applies to periodic sync progress updates while the mapping remains out of sync

Synchronization ProgressLogging

resulting in emails (if emails are configured) but not SNMP traps. Use these fields to enableprogress logging for Library and Share synchronization and to specify the logging interval.

While the library or share is out of sync, emails are sent periodically indicating how manyslots or entries are still out of sync. This information is also logged to the user Event Log. Oneemail is sent for each log entry made for each library or share that is out of sync.

Use these fields to specify the amount of time a mapping needs to be out of sync before async issue is shown in the Issue tab. When an event is generated it results in an entry in the

Out of Sync NotificationSettings

user Event Log and an email and/or an SNMP trap if the appliance is configured to sendthese. These notifications are in addition to a standard notification email sent whenever amapping first becomes unsynchronized and another when synchronization is achieved.

Replication ports should only be changed if replication is blocked by a router on the WAN.

The ports must be the same on both source and target appliances. If in doubt, do NOTchange the port configuration.

Configure Replication

Ports

IMPORTANT: If replication takes place through a firewall, the network administrator must open(TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Data protocol) to allow the replication trafficto pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup systems.

Bandwidth Limiting tabThis tab allows users with an administrator login to apply a general bandwidth setting and configurebandwidth limiting windows.Bandwidth limiting can be used to avoid saturating the WAN with low bandwidth replication tofree up bandwidth for other processes and applications. A minimum of 2Mb/s per concurrent jobis recommended. At least 512Kbps per concurrent job is required for reliable operation. Theselimits apply to all outbound replication jobs from this local appliance.

Local Settings (Replication) tab 93



1. Click the Bandwidth Limiting tab.

2. In the General Bandwidth Limit section, check the General Limit Enabled box.3. Determine the recommended general bandwidth limit, which is a simple calculation of:

(Max WAN Speed) x (Max Desired WAN Usage%).Use the Bandwidth Limit Calculator on this tab to work out limit values. Set the desired WAN

speed and Desired Maximum WAN usage and the Recommended Bandwidth Limit field willshow the desired bandwidth value.4. In the General Bandwidth Limit section, click Edit. Enter the value calculated in the Bandwidth

Limit Calculator in the General Bandwidth Limit field.5. Click Edit to edit the Bandwidth Limiting Windows.

Configure up to two windows for each day. Use the spinners to select the Start Of Restrictionand End Of Restriction times. Enter the appropriate Bandwidth Limit in each required window.(If you use the Bandwidth Limit Calculator, enter the value from the Recommended Limit field.)Check the appropriate Apply First/Second Restriction check boxes. This ensures the specifiedtimes are enabled. If it is not checked, the times are ignored.

NOTE: All settings are applied to the HP StoreOnce Backup system, not for individual jobs.The Bandwidth Limit windows override the General Limit when the time specified for thewindow is active. Outside of Bandwidth Limit windows the General Limit applies.

6. Click Apply.

Blackout Windows tabThis option allows users with an administrator login to specify times when replication should not occur, for example during planned maintenance or heavy network traffic. You can configuremultiple blackout windows.




NOTE: This setting relates to the local appliance in its role as a source or target device. Noreplication jobs will start if the Source or Target Appliance for a mapping is in blackout, and anyrunning jobs for the mapping will be paused.

1. Select the Blackout Windows tab.

2. Click Edit.3. Check the box next to the required day of the week.4. The time boxes become editable. Use the spinner menus to select the appropriate hours.5. Set up as many blackout windows as required.6. Verify the Apply First Time Restriction box is checked. This ensures the specified times are

enabled. If not checked, the times are ignored.7. To enable a second blackout window, ensure the Apply Second Time Restriction box is checked.

The second blackout window for each day must occur after the first blackout window for thatday.

8. Click Apply. On the Appliance tab, the calendar for the Source and Target Appliances reflectsthe changes.

Pause replication jobsThe Pause Replication Jobs button on the Blackout Windows tab places all replication jobs on holdimmediately. Click a second time to resume replication jobs.

Event History (Replication) tabThis page shows the log of all completed replication events on the appliance.

Event History (Replication) tab 95



1. Select the Event History tab.This page presents a time and date stamped list of significant replication events with severitystatus and associated messages. It displays source and target details for the replication event,and identifies the source and target slots. The most recent information is at the top of the list.

2. In the Items per page drop-down, select the number of items you want to view on one page.3. Select an event in the list to view its details in the lower pane.

The history will be maintained if the HP StoreOnce Backup system is power cycled.The Clear Event History button may be used to clear the list.

Searching the event historyThe top of the tab displays a Filter field and two drop-down menus. Use the right-hand drop-downmenu to filter for Severity, for example, to display all Error messages. Use the middle drop-downmenu to select a column (or All) and then type a search string into the Filter box.




VT Mappings (Replication)This page displays details of all replication mappings between source and target libraries.

Administrator users may use the two wizards on this page to configure replication mappings andrecover mappings after a disaster. (NAS share mappings are managed on a separate page.)Use this page to:• View source and target library mappings (all users), see Source and target library

mappings (page 97) . Administrator users may also remove slot mappings and edit slot mappings.

• Run the Replication Wizard to create new mappings (administrator users only), see Runningthe replication wizard (virtual tape devices) (page 99).

• Run the Recovery Wizard to restore mappings (administrator users only), see Recovering asource appliance, VTL devices (page 103).

NOTE: Only administrators can manage mappings. You can only map and replicate librariesof the same version.

NOTE: The above example shows the page layout when mappings were created and a Replication

Source or a Replication Target library was selected. If a non-replicating library is selected, nomappings are configured and the screen displays the Replication and Recovery Wizards.

Source and target library mappingsThe top part of the VT Mappings page contains a list of all available local libraries. Local librariesare the libraries configured on this HP StoreOnce Backup system.• Non-replicating: a library on this HP StoreOnce Backup system with slots not yet mapped for

replication. Replication and Recovery Wizards are available only with non-replicating libraries.• Replication Source: a library on this HP StoreOnce Backup system with cartridges mapped for

replication. You do not have to map all cartridges in a Replication-Source Library, and the

VT Mappings (Replication) 97



Replication-Target Library need not contain the same number of cartridges as theReplication-Source Library.

• Replication Target: a library on this HP StoreOnce Backup system with slots that hold cartridgesreplicated from a Replication-Source library. The option is available to recover individualcartridges from Replication-Target libraries.

NOTE: When selecting a non-replicating library, you can run the Replication or Recoveringwizard.• Use the Replication wizard to create slot mappings for the non-replicating library to make the

library a Source library. See Running the replication wizard (virtual tape devices) for moreinformation.

• Use the Recovery wizard to recover cartridges from a Target Library. See Recovering a sourceappliance, VTL devices for more information.

Table 22 Replication library parameters

The name of the library, defined when the library device was created.Name

The role, which may be Non-replicating, Replication-Source, orReplication-Target. All library devices are initially Non-replicating until slots

have been configured using this page.

Replication Role

The status of the local library (such as online).Status

The amount of user data stored.User Data Stored

The amount of space used on the disk.Size On Disk

The number of slots that have been mapped out of the total number of slotsconfigured on the library device.

Mapped/Total Slots

The emulation type configured for that library.Device Type

The longest time out of sync.Longest Time Out Of Sync

The version number of the library.Library Version

Replication status, which may be Synchronised, Synchronising, or PendingSynchronisation.

Replication status

Slot mappingsSelect a local library to display slot mappings for that library.Users with an administrator login may also remove a slot mapping by clicking the Remove button.Table 23 Slot mapping parameters

Replication-Source or Replication-Target library selected

The slot mapping name. It is created when you run the wizard to define thegrouping of slots that you select.

Slot Mapping Name

The name of the Target Appliance to which cartridges will be replicated.Source/Target Appliance Name

The IP address of the Target Appliance to which cartridges will be replicated.Source/Target Appliance Address

Indicates whether a replication link is established with the partner appliance.Source/Target Appliance Online

The serial number of the Target Appliance to which cartridges will bereplicated.

Source/Target Appliance SerialNumber

The name of the library to which cartridges will be replicated on the Target Appliance.

Source/Target Library Name

The status of the partner library (such as online).Source/Target Library Status




Table 23 Slot mapping parameters (continued)

Time in hours that replication has been out of sync.Time Out Of Sync

Relates to the local appliance in its role as a source or target appliance. Noreplication jobs will be started if the source or target appliance for a mappingare in blackout, and any running jobs for the mapping will be paused.


Shows whether the mapping is synchronized or not.Replication Status

Slot mapping detailsThe tabs at the bottom of this page show more detailed mapping information for the selected libraryand slot mapping.

Mapping details tabThis tab details mapping details between source and target libraries. If a source library is selected,it will indicate if Recovery is in process. If a target library is selected, it will indicate if the targetlibrary is visible to the host. All other information is identical for both source and target libraries.For example, use this tab to determine:• The number of mapped slots and replication status.• The average throughput of data.NOTE: Multiple VTL library source appliances can replicate into a single VTL library targetappliance offering consolidation benefits. This process is known as Fan-in.

Users with an administrator login may edit the Mapping Name on this tab.

Slot detailsThis tab displays details for each mapped slot in the selected slot mapping. It includes averagethroughput data for each slot. When selecting a source library, users with an administrator logincan:•

Edit the Target Slot to which a Source Slot is mapped.• Enable the Recover First checkbox, which enables a user to request that a mapped slot be

recovered from Target to Source, if required (this is sometimes known as reverse replication).

Running the replication wizard (virtual tape devices) When selecting a non-replicating library, you can run the Replication or Recovery Wizard.The Replication Wizard is used to create new mappings between non-replicating libraries (whichbecome Replication Source Libraries) and either existing or new Target Libraries.

IMPORTANT: The Replication Wizard does not allow creation of an encrypted target library. Toreplicate from an encrypted Source library, first create the Target library and enable encryptionso the Target library is also encrypted.1. Create a non-replicating library on the Source Appliance.2. Create a backup rotation scheme and allow the first full backup to run.3. Decide how to seed the first full backup on the Target Appliance. Are you seeding across the

WAN or can you colocate the Target Appliance on the same LAN as the Source Appliance?




4. Go to the Replication—VT Mappings page and select a non-replicating library to be convertedto a Replication Source Library.

5. Click Start Replication Wizard. At the Welcome screen, click Next.

TIP: Click show/hide details box to check how many target appliances are permitted andthe number of target appliances currently configured.

6. Select a Target Appliance from the list and click Next.

NOTE: To select an appliance not yet on the list, click Add Target Appliance. Enter the Target Appliance IP Address or fully qualified domain name. The default values for the Commandand Data Protocol Port Numbers cannot be edited. (If replication takes place through a firewall,the network administrator must open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Dataprotocol) to allow the replication traffic to pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup systems.)Click Add Target Appliance.

See How do I identify the IP address of a service set? (page 86).100 Replication functions



7. The wizard then moves to the Select Target Library step. Select a library on the target applianceand click Next.

NOTE: To create a new library on the target appliance, click Create New Target Library.Configure details as done with creating a new library device.

When creating libraries on a target device it is possible to create libraries with 0 (zero) drives. Attempting to create a library with more drives than those available on the target will fail witha suggestion that there may be too many drives already in use on the target.You cannot create a new target library if Source Appliance Permissions is enabled on theselected target appliance. Instead, the library must first be created on the target before mappingfrom the source.The Replication Wizard does not allow creation of an encrypted target library. To replicatefrom an encrypted Source library, first create the Target library and enable encryption so that

the Target library is also encrypted.

8. At the Edit Slot Mapping step, enter a Slot Mapping Name. The slot number and barcodes ofall source cartridges are displayed. A new barcode is generated on the target library (thesebarcodes will be overwritten with those of the source when replication starts). By default, allslots on the Source are selected for mapping and mapped to available slots on the Target




library. To deselect cartridges from this slot mapping configuration, select Unmapped fromthe Target Slot Name drop-down menu.

9. Click Next to display a summary of the replication configuration that you have created.

10. Click Apply to create the slot mapping configuration. Click OK at the Wizard Completeprompt.Replication of cartridges will start as soon as the libraries have been synchronised. Look atthe Replication Status field on the Library Details section of the VT Mappings page. It changesfrom “Pending Synchronisation” to “Synchronising” to “Synchronized”.

NOTE: If unable to colocate the Target Appliance on the same LAN as the Source Applianceto improve replication performance, relocate the Target Appliance to the target site as soonas the cartridges are synchronized.NOTE: VTLs configured as non-deduplicating can replicate to both deduplicating andnon-deduplicating target libraries. For example, this can be useful to:• Replicate data that does not deduplicate, such as compressed files.• Replicate a copy of critical data needed for instant recovery.




Recovering a Source Appliance (Virtual Tape devices)The Replication Recovery wizard allows administrator users to recover mapping configurationsafter a disaster.For example: the remote site has lost both the host servers and the StoreOnce system. New hardwarewas purchased and installed, and the administrator now wants to recover data to the StoreOnceBackup system and then restore to the host server. Before the failure, a mapping existed betweena Source Library on the remote site StoreOnce Backup system and a Target Library on the Data

Center StoreOnce Backup system. After the failure, the Source Library is missing but the mappingmay or may not still exist.

CAUTION: If you replace the disks in the source StoreOnce Backup system and keep the originalappliance, the source to target mapping will still exist on the repaired StoreOnce Backup system.You MUST BREAK this mapping BEFORE carrying out recovery. If the mapping is left unbrokenthe now-blank Source Library (on the replacement disks) will overwrite the data on the TargetLibrary, effectively losing backup data on both Source and Target Libraries.

1. Create a new non-replicating library on the Source Appliance (either by running the Installationwizard or by using the Devices page).

2. Go to the Replication–VT Mappings page and select the new non-replicating library.

3. Click Start Recovery Wizard. At the Welcome screen, click Next.4. At the Select Target Appliance Step, select Add the Target Appliance and provide the IP

address of the previous replication target device.

5. Select the existing Target Library, or the non-replicating library that was the Target Librarybefore mapping was broken, from which slots should be recovered.

TIP: Use the Click to show/hide details box to view further information about configuredand maximum shares, libraries, and mappings.




6. If the library is an existing Target Library, select the Slot Mapping that was configured andclick Next. If the mapping was broken and the source library reverted to non-replicating, youcan add a new slot mapping.

If the Target Library supports multiple library Fan In, the library may still be a ReplicationTarget if other mappings exist. Recover by adding the mapping back to map the unmappedslots to the new Source Library.

7. All slots in the Target Library are selected by default, but you can deselect any cartridges thatshould not be recovered to the Source Library by checking the Pending One off Recovery box.




8. Click Next to display the Summary page.

9. Click Apply to run reverse replication.10. As soon as reverse replication completes for each slot, the data may be recovered to the host

using the original backup application. This can take time because ALL the data must reversereplicate over the WAN link.

11. New backups can now run to the Source Appliance and replication will run normally withoutfurther configuration.

NAS Mappings (Replication)This page displays details of all replication mappings between source and target shares.

Administrator users may use the two wizards on this page to configure replication mappings andrecover mappings after a disaster. (VT library mappings are managed on a separate page.)Use this page to:• View source and target share mappings (all users). See Source and target share

details (page 106) . Administrator users may also remove share mappings and edit share mappings.

• Run the Replication Wizard to create new share mappings (administrator users only). SeeRunning the replication wizard (NAS) (page 108).

• Run the Replication Recovery Wizard to recover share mappings. See Recovering a sourceappliance (NAS shares) (page 111) .

NOTE: Only administrators can manage mappings. You can only map and replicate deduplicatingshares and map shares of the same version.

NAS Mappings (Replication) 105



NOTE: The above example shows the page layout when mappings were created and a ReplicationSource or a Replication Target share is selected. If a non-replicating share is selected, no mappingsare configured and the screen displays the Replication and Recovery Wizards.

Source and target share detailsThe top half of the NAS Mappings page contains a list of all available NAS shares that wereconfigured on this HP StoreOnce Backup system.• Non-replicating: a share on this HP StoreOnce Backup system that has not yet been mapped

for replication. Replication and Recovering Wizards are available only with non-replicatingshares.

• Replication Source: a share on this HP StoreOnce Backup system that has been mapped forreplication.

• Replication Target: a share on this HP StoreOnce Backup system that has been replicated froma Replication-Source share.

NOTE: When selecting a non-replicating share, you can run the Replication or Recovery Wizard.• Use the Replication Wizard to create mappings for the non-replicating share; it becomes a

Source share. See Running the replication wizard (NAS) (page 108) for more information.• Use the Recovery Wizard to recover files from a Target share. See Recovering a source

appliance (NAS shares) (page 111) for more information.

Table 24 Local share parameters

DescriptionField

The name of the share, defined when the share was created.Name

The role, which may be Non-replicating, Replication Source, or ReplicationTarget. All shares are initially non-replicating until mappings have beenconfigured using this page.

Replication Role

The status of the local share, such as Online.Status

The amount of user data stored.User Data Stored

The amount of space used on the disk.Size On Disk

The access protocol that was configured when the NAS share was created:CIFS or NFS.

Access Protocol

The longest time out of sync.Longest Time Out Of Sync




Table 24 Local share parameters (continued)

DescriptionField

The share version number.Share Version

Replication status, which may be Synchronised, Synchronising, or PendingSynchronisation.

Replication Status

Share mappingsSelect a local share to display its mapping.Users with an administrator login may also remove a share mapping by clicking on the Removebutton.

CAUTION: Do not delete a replication mapping while a backup or restore operation is in progress,because the source device is temporarily taken offline and any backup or restore jobs will fail.

Table 25 Share mapping parameters

Replication-Source or Replication-Target share selected

The share mapping name. It is created when you run the wizard to create theshare mapping.

Mapping Name

The name of the Target Appliance to which entries will be replicated.Source/Target Appliance Name

The IP address of the Target Appliance to which entries will be replicated.Source/Target Appliance Address

Indicates whether a replication link is established with the partner applianceor not.

Source/Target Appliance Online

The serial number of the Target Appliance to which entries will be replicated.Source/Target Appliance SerialNumber

The name of the share to which entries will be replicated on the Target Appliance.

Source/Target Share Name

The status of the partner share, such as Online.Source/Target Share StatusRelates to the local appliance in its role as a source or target appliance. Noreplication jobs will be started if the source or target appliance for a mappingare in blackout, and any running jobs for the mapping will be paused.


Shows the amount of time in hours that replication has been out of sync.Time Out Of Sync

Shows whether the mapping is synchronized.Replication Status

Share mapping detailsThe two tabs at the bottom of this page show more detailed mapping information for the selectedshare and share mapping.

Mapping Details tabThis tab details mapping details between source and target shares. If a source share is selected,it will tell you whether Recovery is in process. All other information is identical for both source andtarget shares. For example, use this tab to find out:• The status of mappings.• The average throughput of data.

Administrators may edit the Mapping Name on this tab.




File Details tabThis tab displays mapping details for each directory and files within it including average throughputdata for each file. You cannot edit any details on this tab, but you can click on any column headingto sort by that column.

Running the replication wizard (NAS)The Replication Wizard creates new mappings between non-replicating NAS shares (which become

Replication Source shares) and existing or new Target shares. (See Recovering a source appliance(NAS shares) (page 111) for information about the Recovery wizard.)

NOTE: NAS replication is a 1:1 relationship from the source to the target. Fan-in, replicatingfrom multiple sources to a single target (available for VTL and StoreOnce Catalyst replication), isnot available with NAS replication.

1. Create a non-replicating share on the Source Appliance.2. Allow the first full backup to run.3. Decide how to seed the first full backup on the Target Appliance. (See the HP StoreOnce

Backup system Concept Guide .)• If seeding across the WAN or can colocate the Target Appliance on the same LAN as

the Source Appliance, go to step 4.• If seeding using physical media:

1. Create the share on the Remote Site share.2. Mount the source NAS share to the host and copy the files from the NAS share to a

USB disk.3. Transport the USB disk to the replication target site.4. Pause housekeeping on the replication target site appliance (see “Pausing

housekeeping” (page 146)) to prevent the transmission of more data than is necessary.5. Insert the USB disk into a host server on the same sub-net as the Target Appliance.

Mount the target NAS share to the host and copy the files across from the USB disk

at the source site.6. Resume housekeeping on the replication target site appliance.

4. Go to the NAS Mappings page.5. Select a non-replicating share to be converted to a Replication Source Share and click Start

Replication Wizard.

6. Proceed to the Select Target Appliance step.

TIP: Click show/hide details box to check how many target appliances are permitted andthe number of target appliances that are currently configured.




7. Select a Target Appliance from the list and click Next.

NOTE: To select an appliance not yet on the list, click Add Target Appliance. Enter the Target Appliance IP Address or fully qualified domain name. The default values for the Commandand Data Protocol Port Numbers may not be edited. (If replication needs to take place througha firewall, the network administrator will need to open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol)and 9388 (Data protocol) to allow the replication traffic to pass to and from the HP StoreOnceBackup systems.) Click Add Target Appliance.See also How do I identify the IP address of a service set? (page 86).




8. The wizard then moves to the Select Target Share step. Select a share on the target applianceand click Next.

NOTE: To create a new share on the target appliance, click Create New Target Share. Setup the details as you would normally do when creating a new share. You cannot create anew target share if the appliance to be used as the target has Replication Source Permissionsenabled.

When creating a new share, a warning indicates that it will take a few seconds for the newshare to come online. Click OK .NOTE: The share version of the source and target NAS shares must be the same. You canchange a share from version 1 to version 2, but you cannot change from version 2 to version1. In addition, you cannot change from version 1 to version 2 if replication mapping is inplace; you must first remove the replication mapping, ensure both the source and target devicesare on StoreOnce software version 3.11.00 or higher (upgrade if necessary), change thesource and target shares to version 2, and then reapply the replication mapping. The itemsin the stores will be synchronized as though you created a new replication mapping but theprocess is quick.

9. Give the Share Mapping a name and click Next.




10. The Summary screen is displayed. Click Apply to create the share mapping configuration.Replication of files will start immediately.

NOTE: If you can colocate the Target Appliance on the same LAN as the Source Applianceto improve replication performance, relocate the Target Appliance to the target site as soonas the files are synchronized.

Recovering a Source Appliance (NAS shares)There are two ways of recovering NAS shares mappings after a disaster.• Reverse replication using the wizard (page 112)• Promotion of Target share over the WAN (page 114)

IMPORTANT: If you replace the disks in the source StoreOnce Backup system and keep theoriginal appliance, the source to target mapping will still exist on the repaired StoreOnce Backupsystem. You MUST BREAK this mapping BEFORE carrying out recovery. If the mapping is leftunbroken, the now blank Source Share (on the replacement disks) will overwrite the data on theTarget Share, effectively losing backup data on both Source and Target Shares.




Reverse replication using the wizardIn this example, the remote site lost both the host servers and the StoreOnce Backup system. Newhardware was purchased and installed, and the administrator must recover data to the StoreOnceBackup system and restore to the host server. Before the failure, a mapping existed between aSource Share on the remote site StoreOnce Backup system and a Target Share on the Data CenterStoreOnce Backup system. After the failure, the Source Share is missing and the mapping will nolonger exist.1. Create a new non-replicating share on the Source Appliance (using the Create button on the

NAS Shares page).2. Reverse seed the first full restore. The simplest way to do this is to use a USB disk, as described

below. It is also possible to recover across the WAN, but this may place an unacceptableload on bandwidth or time availability.It is possible to reverse seed the first full restore using a USB disk, as follows:a. Mount the target NAS share to the host and copy the share to a USB disk attached to the

host.b. Transport the media to the Replication Source site and attach it to a host.c. Pause housekeeping on the replication source site appliance (see “Pausing

housekeeping” (page 146)) to prevent the transmission of more data than is necessary.d. Mount the source NAS share to the host and copy across the data from the USB disk

before running the Recovery Wizard.3. Go to the Replication—NAS Mappings page and select the new non-replicating share.4. Click Start Recovery Wizard.

5. At the Select Target Appliance step, select Add Target Appliance and provide the IP addressof the previous replication target device.




6. Select the existing Target. This is the Target NAS share from which files should be recovered.Click Next.

NOTE: An entry will indicate non-replicating share (instead of Replication Target) becausethe mapping is missing.

7. At the Edit Share Mapping step, create a new mapping and click Next.




8. The Summary screen is displayed. Click Adopt to run reverse replication.

9. As soon as reverse replication completes, the data may be recovered to the host using theoriginal backup application.New backups can now run to the Source Appliance and replication will run normally withoutfurther configuration.

10. Resume housekeeping on the replication source site appliance.

Promoting a Target Share over the WAN using NASIn this example, the remote source site lost both the host servers and the StoreOnce system. Newserver hardware was purchased and installed, and the administrator must recover data to theserver. The administrator has not installed a new StoreOnce Backup system and is going to recoverdata directly to the server from the Data Center StoreOnce appliance over the WAN (which willtake a long time).

NOTE: The procedure described below retains the ability to back up to the Target Share. If thisis not required, an easier solution may be to recover data from the Target Share, which is read-only.NOTE: Keep in mind that recovering high volumes of data by this method (over the WAN) willtake a considerable amount of time. Recovering data at the data centre is much faster and oncerecovered it can be transported to the remote site.

Before the failure, a mapping existed between a Source Share on the remote site StoreOnce Backupsystem and a Target Share on the Data Center StoreOnce Backup system. After the failure, themapping still exists but the Source Share is missing. The Target Share on the Data Center StoreOnceBackup system is still in Target Share mode, it has not had its mappings removed.1. On the Target Appliance in the Data Center, go to the Replication—NAS Mappings page,

select the Target Share, and remove the mapping between it and the lost Source Share.2. The Target Share becomes a non-replicating share.3. Make sure the backup application is targeting the newly non-replicating share at the data

centre and recover the data using the backup application at the data center.4. At this point there is no HP StoreOnce Source Appliance at the remote site. If one is installed

at a later date, reverse recover the data and configure replication as described in Reversereplication using the wizard (page 112).




6 HP StoreOnce Catalyst functionsThe following StoreOnce Catalyst functions are available:• Viewing and managing StoreOnce Catalyst settings, StoreOnce Catalyst (page 116)• Viewing and managing StoreOnce Catalyst stores, Catalyst Stores (page 124)For general information about StoreOnce Catalyst, see What is HP StoreOnce Catalyst (page 115).

NOTE: With the current version of the software there are no equivalent CLI commands availablefor the tasks described in this section.

IMPORTANT: If StoreOnce Catalyst operations pass through a firewall, the network administratormust open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Data protocol) to allow the StoreOnceCatalyst traffic to pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup systems.

Licensing requirementsOST/StoreOnce Catalyst devices require a license to be used at both source and target but doNOT require an additional replication license. To use the security features Data at Rest Encryption,Data in Flight Encryption, or Secure Erase, you must apply a Security license.

OST plug-inFor supported Symantec Netbackup and Backup Exec backup products, a free plug-in applicationis required on each backup application media server that will use the StoreOnce Catalystfunctionality. The plug-in required is different for Netbackup and Backup Exec. The plug-inapplications can be downloaded from http://software.hp.com . Search for StoreOnce.The search result includes the StoreOnce System Software for all products, VSA evaluation files,and QR images for all hardware platforms, plus a link to StoreOnce Free Software. Click onStoreOnce Free Software to access the OST and RMAN plug-ins.

What is HP StoreOnce Catalyst?HP StoreOnce Catalyst is a StoreOnce function that allows:• Backup applications to back up data to a target store on the HP StoreOnce Backup system.

Deduplication may occur on the media server or on the HP StoreOnce Backup system.• Backup applications to copy jobs between HP StoreOnce Backup systems. All configuration

is carried out from the backup application, which makes this an attractive alternative to usingthe replication function on the HP StoreOnce Backup system.

This function requires a backup application that supports HP StoreOnce Catalyst. The HP OSTplugins should also be installed on any Media Servers that will be transferring data to the StoreOnce

Backup system. Refer to www.hp.com/go/ebs for up-to-date details on supported applications.IMPORTANT: Much of the information displayed on the HP StoreOnce Catalyst pages is takendirectly from the backup application. It is strongly recommended to give jobs and media servergroupings names on the backup application that will be meaningful when displayed on theStoreOnce Catalyst pages.

Benefits of HP StoreOnce Catalyst• The backup application is in full control of data for the full lifecycle of the backup data.• The backup application has full visibility of all items and jobs on the HP StoreOnce Backup

system.

What is HP StoreOnce Catalyst? 115

http://software.hp.com/

http://www.hp.com/go/ebs



https://h20392.www2.hp.com/portal/swdepot/index.do



• Deduplication can occur on either the media server or HP StoreOnce Backup system, whichensures efficient use of the available bandwidth.

• There is no limiting geometry, such as cartridges for VTL libraries.• There is no enforced limit on the number of items within a store.• Copy jobs are instigated from the application and have none of the complexities of replication

mapping.•

Space reclamation is much more automated and easier to implement if StoreOnce Catalystdevices types are used.

StoreOnce Catalyst terminology• StoreOnce Catalyst: the name of the StoreOnce function.• StoreOnce Catalyst stores: the targets/device types in which backups are stored on the HP

StoreOnce Backup system.• StoreOnce Catalyst items: the items stored in the StoreOnce Catalyst stores on the HP StoreOnce

Backup system.• StoreOnce Catalyst clients: the generic term for applications that connect using the StoreOnce

Catalyst interface.• Data jobs: any backup or restore job.• StoreOnce Catalyst Optimized Backups: one of the main advantages of HP StoreOnce Catalyst

is that deduplication may occur on either the media server or the HP StoreOnce Backup system.If deduplication occurs on the media server, only unique data is sent to the HP StoreOnceBackup system and a low bandwidth network link is adequate. If the media server sends allthe data and deduplication is carried out on the HP StoreOnce Backup system, a highbandwidth network link is required. It is often faster to deduplicate on the media server dueto the combined CPU power of multiple media servers and reduced network traffic. However,actual performance varies depending upon the data and disk I/O speeds.

•

Copy jobs: allow backup applications to create true copies of the data and not mirror images.The backup application specifies the store on the source StoreOnce Backup system for theoutbound copy job and a target store on the destination StoreOnce Backup system for theinbound copy job. Once copied, the two versions are independent of each other; on eitherthe source or destination StoreOnce Backup system data may subsequently be deleted, moved,or added to, as required, from the backup application.

• StoreOnce Catalyst Optimized Copy: all copy jobs are optimized. This means that the copyjob is completed in a bandwidth-efficient manner. The two stores negotiate so that only uniquedata is transferred.

StoreOnce Catalyst pageThis page has a number of tabs that provide access to the following StoreOnce Catalyst functions:• StoreOnce Catalyst status tab (page 117)• StoreOnce Catalyst settings tab (page 118)• StoreOnce Catalyst clients tab (page 118)• StoreOnce Catalyst blackout windows tab (page 120)• StoreOnce Catalyst bandwidth limiting windows tab (page 121)• Fibre Channel settings tab (page 122)Select StoreOnce Catalyst from the Navigator to display the StoreOnce Catalyst page and associatedtabs.

116 HP StoreOnce Catalyst functions



NOTE: Click + to expand the StoreOnce Catalyst topic in the Navigator and access the StoreOnceCatalyst Stores topic.

StoreOnce Catalyst Status tabThe Status tab displays details about:• StoreOnce Catalyst Status and Protocol Versions• StoreOnce Catalyst Copy and Data Job Throughput Totals• Active SessionsDetails refresh every 10 seconds, so this information provides a useful overview of StoreOnceCatalyst activity on the StoreOnce Backup system. The data displayed on this status page isgenerally for information purposes only; do not make inferences based on the values shown.

Table 26 Throughput totals and active sessions

DescriptionField

The left-hand column shows throughput averages for StoreOnce Catalyst Copy and Data Jobs.StoreOnce CatalystCopy and Data Job Bandwidth indicates the actual physical network bandwidth being used. Throughput indicates

the perceived or logical network bandwidth used (it includes the efficiency achieved throughThroughput Totals(recent averages) deduplication). These are aggregate numbers (). The throughput numbers should correlate with

those shown on the graphs on the Activity page.

The right-hand column shows the number of jobs of each type that are running. Active SessionsData Jobs Running shows the number of backup and restore jobs that are running on theappliance.Outbound Copy Jobs Running shows the number of copy jobs running to another appliance.Inbound Copy Jobs Running shows the number of copy jobs coming in from another appliance.

More about Job typesDifferent backup applications can use different terminology for data transfers. From a StoreOnceCatalyst perspective, if data is being moved between the HP StoreOnce Backup system and amedia or application server, this is a data job. If the transfer is between two HP StoreOnce Backupsystems, this is a StoreOnce Catalyst Copy job. For Copy jobs, the HP StoreOnce Backup systemis responsible for all data movement (although the process is initiated by the backup applicationsoftware). For data jobs the backup application is responsible for the data movement.If the copy job numbers are high (close to the maximum), no user action is required. Copy activitieshappen under the control of the StoreOnce Backup system and it will optimize the queuing andrunning of jobs based on the resources available. If the Data job count starts getting high, the HPStoreOnce Backup system is being loaded quite heavily. You may see jobs failing to start or runningslowly (although the aggregate performance across the many jobs should still be high) due toinsufficient resources being available.

StoreOnce Catalyst page 117



NOTE: The maximum data jobs value is not guaranteed in all cases. In some situations, such aswhen heavily loaded, the actual maximum may be less (based on resources available to the boxat that time).

StoreOnce Catalyst Settings tabThe StoreOnce Catalyst Settings tab is used to view the settings that apply to StoreOnce Catalystfunctions and jobs for all nodes on the HP StoreOnce Backup system. Users with an administratorlogin may also edit these settings.IMPORTANT: First enable Client Access Permission Checking on this page to assign permissionswhen subsequently configuring clients and stores. (If you do not set permissions, all clients canaccess all stores.) Client access is also enabled in the backup application software.

To edit settings (administrators only)1. Click Edit.2. Amend fields as required and click Update.Table 27 StoreOnce Catalyst Settings fields

DescriptionField When enabled, the Clients tab is active and the Permissions tab on the Storespage is active. These tabs enable control over which clients (backup

Client Access Permission Checking

applications) can access which stores on the StoreOnce Backup system. If youdo not set permissions, all clients will be able to access all stores.

The maximum number of outbound copy jobs that can be processedconcurrently. Copy jobs are placed in a queue and processed as soon as

Maximum Concurrent Outbound Copy Jobs

volume of jobs and any configured blackout windows or bandwidth limitingallow. The backup application polls the HP StoreOnce Backup system to identifywhen copy jobs are complete. It is recommended to limit the maximum numberof concurrent outbound copy jobs to 1 per 512 kbps of available bandwidth.

The maximum number of data and inbound copy jobs that can be processedconcurrently. Blackout windows and bandwidth limiting do not apply to thesejobs.

Maximum Concurrent Data andInbound Copy Jobs

IMPORTANT: If StoreOnce Catalyst operations pass through a firewall, the network administratormust open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Data protocol) to allow the StoreOnceCatalyst traffic to pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup systems.

StoreOnce Catalyst Clients tabThis tab is only active if the Client Access Permission Checking box on the Settings tab is enabled.It allows setting up a list of clients (backup applications) that will be displayed on the Permissionstab to restrict client access to a store.




NOTE: The client backup application must first be configured with a client identifier before youcan add details to this tab. See the client backup application documentation for more informationabout configuring identifiers.

To add a client (administrators only)1. Click Add.2. Enter the name of the client and a description.

NOTE: The client application must be configured with a client identifier, such asMediaServer1. This identifier is entered in the Client field. Note that no spaces are allowedin the Client field.

3. Check the features that you desire (if they are supported by the client application):• Enter a password and confirm the password.• Check Allow Store Creation.• Check Manage Server Properties.• Check Manage Client Permissions.

NOTE: Only enable features on the Clients tab that are supported by your client application.

4. Click Update.Table 28 StoreOnce Catalyst Clients fields

DescriptionField

The client identifier is a user-defined string set through the backup applicationsoftware which can be used on the HP StoreOnce Backup system to identify a

Client

client. For example, there may be multiple media servers sharing the same ID;so, the identifier is not a client machine name or a name generated by thesoftware. Best practice is to ensure that the name created on the backupapplication is meaningful for use in searches on the StoreOnce Backup system.

This is a description that can be included on the StoreOnce Backup systemwhen the administrator adds a client.

Description

If the client backup application supports this, you can provide a client password(client passwords are optional and can also be left blank). Once set, any client

Password

that connects will need to supply the password along with their client id. Referto your client application's documentation for further details.






To edit StoreOnce Catalyst blackout windows (administrators only)1. Select the Blackout Windows tab.

2. Click Edit.3. Check the box next to the required day of the week.4. The time boxes become editable. Use the spinner menus to select the appropriate hours.5. Set up as many blackout windows as required.6. Make sure the Apply First Time Restriction box is checked. This ensures the times that have

been specified are enabled. If it is not checked, the times are ignored.7. To enable a second blackout window, make sure the Apply Second Time Restriction box is

checked. The second blackout window for each day must occur after the first blackout windowfor that day.

8. Click Apply.

To pause copy jobs (administrators only)The Pause Copy Jobs button on the Blackout Windows tab places all outbound copy jobs on holdimmediately. Click Pause Copy Jobs a second time to resume outbound copy jobs.

StoreOnce Catalyst Bandwidth Limiting Windows tabThere are four sections to this tab, all of which relate to bandwidth limiting on outbound copy jobs.• Status: Details the current bandwidth limit, if any.• General bandwidth limit: Administrator users may enable and apply a general bandwidth

limit. This is a simple calculation of:(Max WAN Speed) x (Max Desired WAN Usage%).

• Bandwidth limit calculator : Provided to help work out limit values for the general bandwidthlimit and the bandwidth limiting windows.

• Bandwidth limiting windows: Administrator users may specify certain times when differentbandwidth limits may apply. Any bandwidth limit entered will overwrite the general bandwidthlimit.

Bandwidth limiting can be used to avoid saturating the WAN to free up bandwidth for otherprocesses and applications. A minimum of 2Mbps per concurrent job is recommended. At least512Kbps per concurrent job is required for reliable operation. These limits apply to all outboundcopy jobs from this local appliance.




To edit bandwidth limiting (administrators only)1. Display the Bandwidth Limiting Windows tab.

2. Check the General Limiting Enabled box and determine the recommended general bandwidthlimit, which is a simple calculation of:(Max WAN Speed) x (Max Desired WAN Usage%).Use the bandwidth limit calculator provided on this page to work out limit values, if required.

3. Click Edit to edit the Bandwidth Limiting Windows.Configure up to two windows for each day.

Verify the appropriate Apply First/Second Restriction check boxes are checked. This ensuresthe specified times are enabled. If not checked, the times are ignored. Then manually enterthe required Bandwidth Limit in each required window.Use the bandwidth limit calculator provided on this page to work out limit values, if required.

NOTE: All settings are applied to the HP StoreOnce Backup system and not for individualjobs. The Bandwidth Limit windows override the General Limit when the time specified for thewindow is active. The General Limit applies outside of Bandwidth Limit windows.

4. Click Apply.

Fibre Channel Settings tabIf StoreOnce Catalyst over Fibre Channel is enabled, the Fibre Channel Settings tab is available.StoreOnce Catalyst over Fibre Channel functions in the same way as standard StoreOnce Catalyst(over Ethernet). The backup application will not perceive a difference. However, some configurationis required to set up the backup and restore connections between the ports on the HP StoreOnceBackup system and the ports on the client servers. This is done using the Fibre Channel Settingstab.

NOTE: This tab is only available if your HP StoreOnce Backup system supports Fibre Channel.




Initial configurationPlease refer to the HP StoreOnce Backup system Installation and Configuration guide for cablinginstructions and zoning recommendations. The following process describes the steps to completeconfiguration.1. Go to the Fibre Channel Settings tab and, in the bottom section of the screen (Devices), locate

the World Wide Name information for each port on the StoreOnce Backup system. This is theinformation that you need to zone the client with the StoreOnce Backup system.

2. Also look at the Identifier Name in the top section of the screen. This is the FC address of theStoreOnce Backup system and is used to identify the StoreOnce Backup system in the backupapplication. It is in the formatCoFC-<device-id> ; if preferred, you may provide an Identifier Alias, which will be easier to identify from the backup application.

3. The Target Ports section in the center of the screen is identical to the settings that you canconfigure for VTL target devices over FC. The default values are recommended, but you mayedit Speed and Topology.

NOTE: These Fibre Channel settings apply to the whole appliance and can also be editedin the StoreOnce VTL section of the GUI, if you are backing up to StoreOnce VTL library targedevices over Fibre Channel. Port Speed or Topology settings, defined on either page, applyto all target devices being backed up over Fibre Channel.

4. In the Devices section locate the Number of Logins and Devices per Initiator Port for each port.These values determine the number of concurrent backup and restore connections allowed oneach FC port on the HP StoreOnce Backup system.• The Number of Logins defines the number of client-side ports that are zoned to be able

to connect to that port on the StoreOnce Backup system. This cannot be edited.• The Devices per Initiator Port value determines the number of backup and restore

connections that are allowed — for each client login — to that port on the StoreOnceBackup system. This value should be increased if multiple concurrent backup streams arerequired. Note that the maximum allowed is 64.




NOTE: On Linux systems, it is possible that a client HBA port can open multiple concurrentStoreOnce Catalyst over Fibre Channel connections to a target StoreOnce Fibre Channel port andtherefore it is sufficient to have a device count of 1. On Windows and HP-UX, this is not possible.The number of devices per initiator port should be increased when multiple backup streams arerequired so that multiple LUNs are presented to the client.

The number of paths available to a particular client is calculated as:number of client ports zoned * number of StoreOnce node ports zoned *devices per initiator port

Table 29 Example relationships between devices per initiator port and number of connections on Windows and HP-UX

Number of concurrentbackup and restore sessionsDevices per Initiator port

HP StoreOnce BackupsystemClient-side

414 ports1 port zoned to

814 ports2 ports zoned to



StoreOnce Catalyst Stores pageSelect StoreOnce Catalyst—Stores from the Navigator to display the Stores page and tabs.The top half of the Stores page shows all stores configured for the appliance. Click on a store todisplay its details in the lower half of the page. Users with an administrator login may edit thesesettings or delete stores, and may also create new stores.The lower half of the page has the following tabs:• Store Details tab (page 125), includes functions for creating and managing stores•

Permissions tab (page 128)• Item Summary tab (page 128)• Data jobs tab (page 130)• Outbound copy jobs tab (page 133)• Inbound copy jobs tab (page 137)




Table 30 Store fields

DescriptionField

The name of the store. This may be created manually through the HP StoreOnce Backup systemor generated by the backup application.

Name

The version of the store. Version

The status of the store. When you create a store you will see the status change until it becomesOnline.

Status

The date and time that the store was created.Created

The number of StoreOnce Catalyst items contained within the store.Number of CatalystItems

The amount of data stored. This is the amount of data that the user has backed up and reconcileswith the logical data recorded on the backup application.

User Data Stored

The size of the store on the disk. This is the physical disk space consumed; the actual size afterdeduplication.

Size On Disk

The dedupe ratio which is the ratio of duplicate data against new data identified in the datajob.

Dedupe Ratio

Store details tabThe Store Details tab displays the details that were specified when the store was created. Userswith an administrator logon may create and edit store details and delete stores.

Table 31 Store details

DescriptionField

The name of the store. This may be created manually through the HP StoreOnce Backup systemor generated by the backup application.

Name

A description for the store.Description

The retention period for information about data jobs. This information is displayed on the Data Jobs tab, which provides a log of all data job activity. The default is 90 days.

Data Job RetentionPeriod (Days)

The retention period for information about inbound copy jobs. This information is displayedon the Inbound Copy Jobs tab, which provides a log of all data job activity. The default is 90days.

Inbound Copy Job LogRetention Period(Days)

StoreOnce Catalyst Stores page 125



Table 31 Store details (continued)

DescriptionField

The retention period for information about outbound copy jobs. This information is displayedon the Outbound Copy Jobs tab, which provides a log of all data job activity. The default is90 days.

Outbound Copy JobLog Retention Period(Days)

This may be High or Low.Primary (Default)Transfer Policy • High means all data is sent from the media server and deduplicated on the HP StoreOnce

Backup system. This can also be described as target-side deduplication.• Low means that the media server deduplicates the data and sends only unique data. This

can also be described as source-side deduplication.The primary transfer policy is the default transfer policy for the server. Each media server maybe configured individually to use the most efficient transfer policy. As long as the two transferpolicies have different values, the media server will determine which is the most bandwidthefficient transfer policy to use.The value is set to Low Bandwidth and cannot be changed.

This may be High or Low (see definitions in row above) and is normally the opposite to thePrimary transfer policy so that the media server can choose to use which is most appropriate.

Secondary TransferPolicy

However, if you wish to enforce the transfer policy that the media server uses, set both Primaryand Secondary transfer policies to the same value.

The value is set to Low Bandwidth and cannot be changed.

This quota is for the amount of data actually written to disk after deduplication. If the quota isenabled and the quota limit is reached, backups will fail in order to prevent the quota from

Physical Data SizeQuota

being exceeded. The quota allows you to partition the physical capacity of the appliancebetween various users (and users with a better deduplication ratio can store more data).

NOTE: If capacity management is required, HP recommends configuring backup applicationswith quotas to reroute to another device or to postpone backups to prevent backups from failingunexpectedly.

When a StoreOnce Catalyst store reaches its quota, the status of the StoreOnce Catalyst storewill change to “Online - Critical”. The StoreOnce Catalyst Status will also change to “Fault”.Restores from that store are permitted but new backups will fail. When the quota is no longermet, either by increasing the quota or by expiring backups, the StoreOnce Catalyst store statusand the overall StoreOnce Catalyst status will return to the “Running” state.If you use this feature in conjunction with Client-Permissions to control a client’s access to theStoreOnce Catalyst store, you can effectively define how much space a particular user isallowed to use on the HP StoreOnce Backup system. With many users using the same system,this allows you to control how much disk space is available to individual users.

This quota is for the amount of data a user sends to the device before deduplication. If thequota is enabled and the quota limit is reached, backups will fail in order to prevent the quota

Logical Data SizeQuota

from being exceeded. This allows you to provide a service to back up a particular amount ofuser data. For example, set this when you charge customers per TB of user data protected.

NOTE: If capacity management is required, HP recommends configuring backup applicationswith quotas to reroute to another device or to postpone backups to prevent backups from failingunexpectedly.

When a StoreOnce Catalyst store reaches its quota, the status of the StoreOnce Catalyst storewill change to “Online - Critical”. The StoreOnce Catalyst Status will also change to “Fault”.Restores from that store are permitted but new backups will fail. When the quota is no longermet, either by increasing the quota or by expiring backups, the StoreOnce Catalyst store statusand the overall StoreOnce Catalyst status will return to the “Running” state.If you use this feature in conjunction with Client-Permissions to control a client’s access to theStoreOnce Catalyst store, you can effectively define how much space a particular user isallowed to use on the HP StoreOnce Backup system. With many users using the same system,this allows you to control how much disk space is available to individual users.




Table 31 Store details (continued)

DescriptionField

Check this box to enable data encryption. Encryption cannot be enabled after a store is created;it must be enabled at store creation. Also, encryption cannot be disabled once it has been setfor a store. If enabled, encryption will be performed prior to writing data to disk for this store.

Store EncryptionEnabled

Once the library is created and the correct license is applied, the Secure Erase Mode boxappears on the Catalyst Store Details tab. The selection box defaults to None, meaning Secure

Secure Erase Mode

Erase is disabled. To enable Secure Erase, select the preferred number of Overwrite Passes(1, 3, 5, or 7). If enabled, this feature allows you to securely erase confidential data that mayhave unintentionally been backed up as part of a regular backup job. See “SecurityFeatures” (page 19) and “Licensing” (page 17) for more information.

To create a new store (administrators only)1. Click Create at the top right of the StoreOnce Catalyst Stores page.2. Provide the store details as described in Table 31 (page 125) .

NOTE: If the proper license was applied, an Encryption Enabled check box is displayed.To enable encryption for the new store, you must do it at this time by checking the EncryptionEnabled box. See “Security Features” (page 19) and “Licensing” (page 17) for more

information. When you have completed the store details, click Create.

3. The store is created and displayed in the Stores list where its status changes from Creating toOnline. To enable the Secure Erase feature (if you have a license), see “To edit store details(administrators only)” (page 127).

To edit store details (administrators only)1. Select the store in the list to display its details and then click Edit.2. Amend details as appropriate and click Update to apply the changes.

NOTE: Once the store is created and if the proper license is applied, a Secure Erase Modebox is displayed. If enabled, this feature allows you to securely erase confidential data thatmay have unintentionally been backed up as part of a regular backup job. See “SecurityFeatures” (page 19) and “Licensing” (page 17) for more information.

To delete a store (administrators only)Select the required store and then click Delete in the Store Details tab to delete it. You will beprompted to confirm the deletion; click Delete to delete the store, or click Cancel to cancel thecommand.




Permissions tab (administrators only)This tab is only active if the Client Access Permission Checking box has been enabled on the Settingstab. The Client list is only populated with individual clients or client groupings if you configuredclients on the Clients tab.You can set the Physical Data Size Quota and Logical Data Size Quota (on the Store Details tab)to use in conjunction with Client-Permissions. This allows you to effectively define how much spacea particular user is allowed to use on the HP StoreOnce Backup system. This may be useful with

many users using the same system and you wish to control how much disk space is available toindividual users.1. Click Edit to change the permissions.

2. The default setting is No Access, which means that the client cannot access the store for dataor copy jobs. Click the appropriate Access button for the client(s) who should have access,then click Update.

Item summary tabThis tab provides summary details of each item in the store.• Use the filter options to locate the required item(s).• By default, 50 items are displayed per page. This can be changed from the Items Per Page

drop-down. Use the scroll bar to scroll through all items on the page or use the Prev or Nextbuttons to display more pages.

• Once items are displayed, administrator users may use the Delete button to delete a selected

item.NOTE: This is not recommended. It is better to let the backup application remove items toensure integrity within backup catalog. Only use Delete as a last resort.

• All users may use the buttons under the item details to show Related Data Jobs, OutboundCopy Jobs, or Inbound Copy Jobs for the selected item.

NOTE: This tab provides a report; it is not automatically refreshed.




1. If necessary, click + to display the filter options.

Check the boxes against the options that you wish to use. Specify as many options as possibleto narrow the search results. Wild cards or boolean logic (AND/OR filters) are not supported.• The item name is a unique identifier that is always defined on the backup application.• Sub-string matches are supported, so the filter will return any item that contains the

character string that has been entered. With Item Name you can also specify that it shouldbe an Exact Match.

• With the Created and Last Modified fields, enter a range of dates.• The Tag Lists allow you to filter any tags that the client may have added to the data. You

may enter as many tags as required; they should be space separated, with no commas.If you leave All Match unchecked, the filter will retrieve all items that have any of the tagsspecified. If you check All Match, it will retrieve only those items that have all the tagsspecified.

2. Click Show Items.3. A report listing items is displayed.

Table 32 Item summary fields

DescriptionField

The name of the item. This is the name that is generated by the backup application.Item Name

The date that the item was created.Created

The date that the item was last modified.Last Modified




Table 32 Item summary fields (continued)

DescriptionField

A list of any tags to include or exclude when searching for the item.Tag List

The size of the data within the item.Data Size

4. Click on an item within a list to display further details about it in the lower part of the page.

Table 33 Item summary detailsDescriptionField

The name of the item. This is the name that is generated by the backup application.Item Name

The date that the item was created.Created

A list of any tags that are attached to this item.Tag List

The date that the item was last modified.Last Modified

The size of the data within the item.Data Size

The version of the item. Currently, this is always 1. Version

The size of the meta data associated with the item. Meta data is created by the backupapplication.Meta Data Size

The dedupe block size. Currently, the block value is always Variable.Dedupe Block Size

Data jobs tabThis tab provides a log with details about data jobs for the selected store.• Use the filter options to locate the required job(s).• By default, 50 items are displayed per page. This may be changed from the Items Per Page

drop-down. Either use the scroll bar to scroll through all items on the page or use the Prev or

Next buttons to display more pages.• Values that you set in Settings control how long data jobs are retained for (default is 90 days).





1. If necessary, click + to display the filter options.Check the boxes against the options that you wish to use. Specify as many options as possibleto narrow the search. Wild cards and boolean logic (AND/OR filters) are not supported.• The name of the item is a unique identifier that is always defined on the backup

application. Similarly, the client name is defined on the backup application. Best practiceis to ensure that client names are also meaningful for use in searches on the StoreOnceBackup system.

• Sub-string matches are supported, so the filter will return any item that contains thecharacter string that has been entered. With Item Name and Client you can also specifythat it should be an Exact Match.

• With the Start Time and End Time fields, enter a range of dates and times.• Select a Status which may be Running, Completed or Cancelled.

2. Click Show Jobs.3. A report listing data jobs is displayed. Use the Sort Results option to sort the results

alphabetically.




Table 34 Data job fields

DescriptionField

The name of the item within data job. This name is created by the backup application.Each data job may have multiple items.

Item Name

The status of the data job item, which may be:Status• Running: in progress• Completed: the item has completed successfully, this does not mean the data job has

completed, only the item, and does not reconcile with the backup application jobcompletion status

• Cancelled: the Status Information provides more details, for example, the dataconnection has been lost between the HP StoreOnce Backup system and the mediaserver (this is unlikely to occur)

• Unexpected error: the StoreOnce Backup system has experienced a problem wholeprocessing the item

• Insufficient disk space: it will be necessary to clear some disk space or add more storage• Link failure: IP connectivity has been lost and the backup application must retry the job• System shutdown: System has been shut down

NOTE: The backup application must be configured to tidy up any incomplete or orphaneditems before retrying the job.The amount of user data that was written. This reconciles with the information in the backupapplication's log, but note that a backup job may span multiple items.

Data Written

The write throughput speed. The first figure, expressed in MB/s, is the logical bandwidth;the second figure, expressed in Mb/s is the physical bandwidth consumed. The %

Write Throughput

bandwidth saving depends upon whether the store has been configured for source-sidededuplication with a low-bandwidth transfer policy, or target-side deduplication with ahigh-bandwidth transfer policy. See Store Details tab (page 125).

The amount of user data that was read.Data Read

The read throughput speed. This only has one value because read throughput is alwayshigh throughput without any % saving.

Read Throughput

The client that initiated the data job, as defined on the backup application. The IP addressin the brackets is for information and not part of the client name. It is best practice to

Client Identifier

ensure that a meaningful name is given to the client within the backup application. If noclient was defined on the backup application, only the IP address is shown.

The time the job started.Start Time

The time the job ended.End Time




4. Click on an item within a list to display further details about it in the lower part of the page.Table 35 Data job details

DescriptionField

The name of the item within data job. This name is created by the backup application.Each data job may have multiple items.

Item Name

The status of the data job item, as described in the previous table.

NOTE: The backup application must be configured to tidy up any incomplete or orphaneditems before retrying the job.

Status

Status information, as appropriate to the Status reported.Status Information

The time the job started.Start Time

The time the job ended.End Time

A name that identifies the client user who created the item.Client Identifier

Displays the IP address of the server that created the item.Client Address

The name of the application that created the item. Application Identifier

The deduplication ratio.Deduplication Ratio

The amount of user data that was written. This reconciles with the information in the backupapplication's log, but note that a backup job may span multiple items.

Data Written

The length of time that data was written. Write Duration

The write throughput speed, expressed in MB/s, is the logical bandwidth. Write Throughput

The amount of data transferred.Data Transferred

The bandwidth utilisation in Mb/s. This is the physical bandwidth consumed.Bandwidth Utilisation

The amount of bandwidth saved. The % bandwidth saving depends upon whether thestore has been configured for source-side deduplication with a low-bandwidth transferpolicy, or target-side deduplication with a high-bandwidth transfer policy. See Store Detailstab (page 125) .

Bandwidth Saving

The amount of data read.Data Read

The length of time that data was read.Read Duration

The read throughput speed. Read throughput is always high throughput without any %saving.

Read Throughput

Outbound copy jobs tabThis tab provides a log with details of all outbound copy jobs for the selected store.• Use the filter options to locate the required job(s).• By default, 50 items are displayed per page. This may be changed from the Items per Page

drop-down. Either use the scroll bar to scroll through all items on the page; or use the Prev orNext buttons to display more pages.

• Values that you set in Settings control how long outbound copy jobs are retained for (defaultis 90 days).





1. If necessary, click + to display the filter options.Check the boxes against the options that you wish to use. Specify as many options as possibleto narrow the search. Wild cards and boolean logic (AND/OR filters) are not supported.• The name of the item is a unique identifier that is always defined on the backup

application. Similarly, the client name is defined on the backup application. Best practiceis to ensure that client names are also meaningful for use in searches on the StoreOnceBackup system.


• With the Start Time and End Time fields, enter a range of dates and times.• Select a Status which may be Pending, Running, Paused, Completed, or Cancelled.

2. Click Show Jobs.3. A report listing outbound copy jobs is displayed. Use the Sort Results option to sort the results

alphabetically.

Table 36 Outbound copy job fields

DescriptionField

The name of the item being copied from the outbound copy job. This name is created bythe backup application.

Item Name

The status of the outbound copy job, which may be Queued, Paused, Running, Cancelled,or Completed. If the status information displays —, no further information is available.


Status

The amount of data to be copied in the copy job.Data Size

The copy speed.Copy Throughput




Table 36 Outbound copy job fields (continued)

DescriptionField

The address of the target server. The target is the other StoreOnce Backup system to whichthe job is being copied from the this HP StoreOnce Backup system. All target details arespecified by the backup application when the outbound copy job is created.

Target Appliance

The name of the target store on the StoreOnce Backup system to which the job is beingcopied.

Target Store

The name of the target item on the StoreOnce Backup system to which the job is beingcopied. All item names are defined by the backup application.

Target Item Name

The client that initiated the outbound copy job. The client name is defined in the backupapplication.

Client Identifier

The time the job was queued.Queued Time

The time the job started.Started Time

The time the job ended.Stopped Time






Table 37 Outbound copy job fields (continued)

DescriptionField

policy, or target-side deduplication with a high-bandwidth transfer policy. See Store Detailstab (page 125) .

If there are multiple unsuccessful attempts, a network link may be down or a blackoutwindow may be scheduled.

Unsuccessful Retry Attempts

This is the time that the next copy will be attempted, if the previous one was unsuccessful.Next Copy AttemptTime

This indicates whether the user has cancelled the copy job or not.Copy OperationCancelled

To cancel a copy jobHP recommends canceling copy jobs via the backup application and only using the GUI as a lastresort. This ensures that the backup application catalog stays in sync with the backup images.1. Select the job to be cancelled in the outbound copy job list.2. Click Cancel Job.3. At the confirmation prompt, click OK .

Inbound copy jobs tabThis tab provides a log with details about inbound copy jobs for the selected store.• Use the filter options to locate the required job(s).• By default, 50 items are displayed per page. This may be changed from the Items per Page

drop-down. Either use the scroll bar to scroll through all items on the page; or use the Prev orNext buttons to display more pages.

• Values that you set in Settings control how long inbound copy jobs are retained for (defaultis 90 days).





1. If necessary click + to display the filter options.Check the boxes against the options that you wish to use. Specify as many options as possibleto narrow the search. Wild cards and boolean logic (AND/OR filters) are not supported.• The name of the item is a unique identifier that is always defined on the backup

application. Similarly, the client name is defined on the backup application. Best practiceis to ensure that names are also meaningful for use in searches on the StoreOnce Backupsystem.


• With the Start Time and End Time fields, enter a range of dates and times.• Select a Status which may be Pending, Running, Paused, Completed, or Cancelled.

2. Click Show Jobs.3. A report listing inbound copy jobs is displayed. Use the Sort Results option to sort the results

alphabetically.




Table 38 Inbound copy job fields

DescriptionField

The name of the item being copied to the inbound copy job. This name is created by thebackup application.

Item Name

The status of the inbound copy job, which may be Queued, Paused, Running, Cancelled,or Completed.

Status

The amount of data in the copy job.Data Size


The address of the source appliance. The source is this HP Backup system. All sourcedetails are specified by the backup application when the inbound copy job is created.

Source Appliance

The name of the source store for the inbound copy job.Source Store

The name of the source item. All item names are defined by the backup application.Source Item Name

The client that initiated the inbound copy job. The client name is defined in the backupapplication.

Client Identifier

The time the job was queued.Queued Time

The time the job started.Started TimeThe time the job ended.Stopped Time




4. Click on an item within a list to display further details about it in the lower part of the page.Table 39 Inbound copy job fields

DescriptionField

The name of the item being copied to the inbound copy job. This name is created by thebackup application.

Item Name

The status of the inbound copy job, which may be Queued, Paused, Running, Cancelled,or Completed. If the status information displays —, no further information is available.


Status

This will be a — unless the job has been cancelled or paused.Status Information

The percentage of the copy job that has been completed.Percent Complete

The client that initiated the inbound copy job. The client name is defined in the backupapplication.

Client Identifier

Displays the IP address of the server that created the item.Client Address

The name of the application that created the item. Application Identifier

The time the copy job was queued.Queued TimeThe time the copy job was started.Started Time

The time the job ended.Stopped Time

The estimated completion time, if the copy job is still running.Estimated CompletionTime

The address of the source server. The source is the StoreOnce Backup system from whichthe job is being copied to this HP StoreOnce Backup system.

Source Appliance

The name of the source store on the StoreOnce Backup system from which the job is beingcopied.

Source Store

The name of the source item on the StoreOnce Backup system from which the job is beingcopied. All item names are defined by the backup application.

Source Item Name


The size of the source item to be copied; this may be larger than the data size value (butno smaller).

Source Item Size

The date that the source item was last modified. This is useful if you need to check whetherthe source item might have been modified during the copy attempt. An error message isalso generated if the source item is modified whilst copying.

Source Item LastModified

This identifies where the data to be copied occurs within the source item.Source Item CopyOffset

This identifies the size of the data to be copied within the source item.Source Item CopySize

This identifies where the data to be copied should be placed within the destination item.Destination ItemCopy Offset

The amount of time taken to copy the data.Copy Duration

The amount of data copied, which should match the data size.Data Copied

The bandwidth utilisation in Mb/s. This is the physical bandwidth consumed.Bandwidth Utilisation

The amount of bandwidth saved. The % bandwidth saving depends upon whether thestore has been configured for source-side deduplication with a low-bandwidth transfer

Bandwidth Saving

policy, or target-side deduplication with a high-bandwidth transfer policy. See Store Detailstab (page 125) .




Table 39 Inbound copy job fields (continued)

DescriptionField

This indicates whether the user has cancelled the copy job or not.Copy OperationCancelled

To cancel a copy job

HP recommends to cancel copy jobs via the backup application and only use the GUI as a lastresort. This ensures that the backup application catalog stays in sync with the backup images.

NOTE: If you use the GUI to cancel an inbound copy job, it is recommended to cancel the jobin the source outbound copy jobs list first.

1. Select the job to be cancelled in the inbound copy job list.2. Click Cancel Job.3. At the confirmation prompt click OK .

System information messages A job may have been cancelled for the following reasons that will be shown in the Status Informationfield:• Cancelled By User : the copy job was cancelled either through the backup application or via

the StoreOnce GUI.• Unexpected Error : Contact HP Support.• Lock Release Request: the destination StoreOnce Catalyst item was opened by another process.

Most backup applications should prevent this from occurring.• Out of Space: there is insufficient disk space. Take one of the following actions:

Expire backups that are no longer required and wait for housekeeping to free up space.1.2. Purchase additional storage.

3. Perform the copy to a different store that has available free capacity.• Not Licensed: the destination store does not have a license in place to accept copies for this

backup application. Check the installed licenses and resubmit the copy job once the licenseis applied.

• Permission Denied: the client requesting the copy no longer has permission to access thedestination store. Check access permissions on the destination appliance then resubmit thecopy job.

• ObjectStore Not Present: the destination store is no longer available. Check the destinationappliance and ensure the store exists. This error may occur if a store is deleted whilst copiesare still queued.

• ObjectStore Origin Same As Destination: backups are being copied within a store. Mostbackup applications should prevent this from occurring.

• Object Not Present: backups are being copied within a store. Most backup applications shouldprevent this from occurring.

• Server Incorrect Address Or Protocol: the backup application should validate input. If thismessage occurs, check the backup application configuration.

• Object Extent or Offset Invalid: the backup application tried to copy a backup incorrectly.Check the backup application setup.

• Object Changed Whilst Queued or Paused: check the backup policy; their backup applicationis making changes to StoreOnce Catalyst items when it should not. Try the copy again withinthe backup application.




• Object Not Ready: contact HP Support.• Job State Inconsistency Found: contact HP Support.

A job may have been paused for the following reasons:• Link failure: the network between the appliances is down.Check the network connectivity.

Once the connection is re-established, the copy should automatically continue.• Shutdown: the source or destination appliance was shutdown. Once the appliance is back

online, the copy should automatically continue.• Blackout window: a blackout window is in effect on the source appliance. Once the blackout

window expires, the copy should automatically continue.• Server Too Busy: the source or destination appliance is too busy to run the copy job. When

resources are available, the copy job will be automatically restarted.• System shutdown: the system has been shut down.




7 Housekeeping functionIMPORTANT: Housekeeping is an important process to maximize the deduplication efficiency ofthe appliance. You must ensure that the housekeeping process has enough time to complete.Running backup, restore, replication, and StoreOnce Catalyst Store operations with no break (i.e.,24 hours a day) can result in housekeeping never completing.

The Housekeeping page:• Contains tabs that display housekeeping statistics and graphs, see The Housekeeping

page (page 143)• Allows administrators to configure housekeeping blackout windows, see Configuring blackout

windows (page 146)• Allows administrators to pause housekeeping, see Pausing housekeeping (page 146)

NOTE: With the current version of the software there are no equivalent StoreOnce CLI commandsavailable for the tasks described in this section.

The Housekeeping pageSelect Housekeeping from the HP StoreOnce menu to display current and housekeeping activity.The following tabs display housekeeping statistics and graphs: Overall (default), Libraries, Shares,and StoreOnce Catalyst. Users with an administrator login can also configure blackout windowsfor housekeeping on the Blackout Windows tab.

Housekeeping statisticsUse the housekeeping statistics to monitor the current housekeeping activity.

Table 40 Overall tab housekeeping statistics

DescriptionField

Status is one of the following:Status• Running – The housekeeping process is active.• Starting — The housekeeping process is starting up.• Stopping — The housekeeping process is shutting down.

The Housekeeping page 143



Table 40 Overall tab housekeeping statistics (continued)

DescriptionField

The status will include one of the following:• Green check – there are no warnings• Amber warning – the housekeeping queue has not been

empty within the last 24 hours but has been emptywithin the last seven days

• Red alert – the housekeeping queue has not been emptywithin the last seven days Warnings and alerts require further investigation becausebackup and replication performance is affected.

The date and time that housekeeping last completelyemptied the housekeeping queue.

Last Complete

Data that has been deleted/overwritten but not yet clearedby housekeeping.

User data pending housekeeping

The amount of disk space estimated to be reclaimed basedon the amount of data to be deleted. This can change as

Estimated disk space to reclaim

jobs are processed. This field will display “—” if there is

not enough history available to make an estimate or if thereis no housekeeping to do.1

The estimated time until the current outstandinghousekeeping will be processed based on the amount of

Estimated time to completion

data to be cleared by housekeeping. This field will display“—” if there is not enough history available to make anestimate or if there is no housekeeping to do.1

Indicates whether there is any outstanding Secure Erasedata (yes/no). See “Secure Erase” (page 20) for moreinformation.

Secure Erase data pending reclaim

1 The Estimated disk space to reclaim and the Estimated time to completion are based on historical trends. In the earlystages of a retention lifecycle where data overwrite has only recently started to occur, or where a large amount of datais suddenly deleted, these estimates will be unrealistic until enough data is processed to improve the accuracy of theestimate.

Similar statistics are shown on the individual tabs for the different types of target devices. All tablesare updated every five minutes.

144 Housekeeping function



Table 41 Libraries, Shares, and StoreOnce Catalyst tabs housekeeping statistics

DescriptionColumn

Identifies the device nameLibraries/Shares/Catalyst Stores

See Table 40 (page 143)Status

Indicates if the share is enabled for the Secure Erasefeature. “None” means Secure Erase is not enabled. “[x]

Secure Erase Mode

Overwrite Passes” means Secure Erase is enabled andindicates the number of times the data will be overwritten(1, 3, 5, or 7) when deleted.Even if a store is currently not in Secure Erase mode, it maybe processing Secure Erase jobs that were present beforethe mode was changed.

See Secure Erase data pending reclaim in Table 40Outstanding Secure Erase

See User data pending housekeeping in Table 40Pending Delete

See Estimated disk space to reclaim in Table 40Estimated Reclaim

See Estimated time to completion in Table 40Time to Complete

See Table 40Last Complete

Housekeeping graphsUse the housekeeping graphs to view historical housekeeping activity. Both graphs are updatedevery hour. On all tabs, the graphics can be filtered by:• Time period

Day, with hourly resolution for the last 24 hours◦

◦ Week, with a daily resolution for the last 7 days

◦ Month, with a daily resolution for the last 31 days• Data

All◦

◦ Secure housekeeping only

◦ Non-secure housekeeping only

The top graph, Deleted User Data Pending Housekeeping, displays information about the data. Itrepresents a snapshot of the size of the housekeeping queue (the amount of data deleted oroverwritten but not yet processed) on the hour for the previous hour when viewing the "Day" timeperiod, or at 12:00 midday for the last day when viewing the "Week" or "Month" time period.This graph may not show any data if all housekeeping is processed promptly and does not spanover the end of the hour. However, if the amount of data shown is increasing and housekeepingnever completes, consider removing or reducing blackout periods or scheduling backups moreappropriately to allow housekeeping to complete.The bottom graph, Housekeeping Data Processed, displays information for:• User Data Processed – how much deleted data was processed as housekeeping since the last

sample point• Disk Space Reclaimed – how much space recovery (secure and insecure) was realized by the

processed data since the last sample point

The Housekeeping page 145



NOTE: After a power cycle, the start of housekeeping is delayed for 15 minutes. The graphs willnot recalculate during that time. As housekeeping resumes, the housekeeping queue is recalculated.The queue will show the number of jobs increasing even if new jobs are not being created. Ifhousekeeping is paused (or in blackout), the queue will not display existing jobs until housekeepingis re-enabled. However, new housekeeping jobs will be reported.

Configuring blackout windowsScheduling housekeeping blackout windows to cover the period during which backups are occurringcan improve backup performance. Housekeeping windows apply across the whole appliance.

On the Blackout Windows tab, click Edit and enter the appropriate Start of Restriction and End ofRestriction times for each window. Verify the Apply First Time Restriction box is checked. Thisensures the times that are specified are enabled. If it is not checked, the times will be ignored.

Configure up to two windows for each day. Settings apply to all devices on the appliance.

TIP: Ideally, housekeeping blackout windows should be set for those times when the HP StoreOnceBackup system is running backup or replication or StoreOnce Catalyst copy.

Pausing housekeepingOn the Blackout Windows tab, click Pause Housekeeping to pause the housekeeping process. Thissetting applies to all devices, libraries, and shares on the HP StoreOnce Backup system. The pauseis not retained if the power fails or the HP StoreOnce Backup system is powered down.Housekeeping should not be left in the paused state for significant amounts of time; pause only as

a maintenance tool.146 Housekeeping function



8 StoreOnce reportingThe following reporting options are specific to HP StoreOnce functions:• Activity report (page 147)• Reporting page (page 148)

IMPORTANT: HP StoreOnce Enterprise Manager is a standalone software application thatprovides basic management capabilities in a replication environment and provides an easy wayfor customers to manage multiple devices being replicated across multiple sites. Enterprise Manageralso provides comprehensive reporting of StoreOnce performance and disk usage and is stronglyrecommended.The software, including documentation, can be downloaded free of charge from: http://software.hp.com. Search for StoreOnce. The search result includes the StoreOnce System Softwarefor all products, VSA evaluation files, and QR images for all hardware platforms, plus a link toStoreOnce Free Software. Click on StoreOnce Free Software to access the SEM downloads.

Activity reportSelect HP StoreOnce→ Activity from the navigation tree. This page displays the following graphsthat illustrate system activity:• Backup from hosts to all target devices• Replication and StoreOnce Catalyst copy between StoreOnce appliances

NOTE: The graphs represent logical throughput rates, not physical data transfer rates. If Replicationor StoreOnce Catalyst bandwidth limiting is in use, these graphs will not peak at the physicalbandwidth throttling value. (See “Bandwidth Limiting tab” (page 93) or “StoreOnce Catalystbandwidth limiting windows tab” (page 121), respectively.)

These graphs are updated every five seconds and provide useful feedback about the activity onthe HP StoreOnce Backup system.

Current NAS write backup activity graph

Activity report 147









Current replication and StoreOnce Catalyst copy job throughput graph

Reporting pageSelect HP StoreOnce→ Reporting from the navigation tree to display reports.This page has four storage reporting tabs: Overall, Libraries, Shares, and StoreOnce Catalyst.On each tab, you have the option to export a CSV (comma separated value) file by clicking ExportDisk Storage to CSV . The Overall tab CSV file provides information such as appliance serialnumbers, type of device, name of device, time stamp, size on disk, and user data stored. Onsubsequent tabs you can generate a CSV file per store, share, or library. For example, chooseany library and get its storage utilization over a specific period of time (week or month).Each tab allows selection of Data and/or the Period from drop-down boxes to specify the axes for

the graph. Summary statistics are displayed at the foot of the page.The Data types are:• Disk Storage• Dedupe Ratio• Disk Storage Daily Change• Disk Storage Weekly ChangeThe Period may be changed to Week or Month.In the following example, Disk Storage has been selected as the Data type.

148 StoreOnce reporting


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hp-storeonce-backup-system-user-guide 149/269Reporting page 149



9 Hardware Problem and Storage ReportingThe following reports are available from the Navigator and provide valuable information aboutthe status of hardware and physical disk storage:• Hardware Problem Report (page 150) (only available on HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210, 4220,

4420, and 4430 Backup systems)

• Storage Report (page 151)

Hardware Problem ReportNOTE: The Hardware Problem report is only available with HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210, 4220,4420, and 4430 Backup systems because on other systems the Hardware tree provides the sameinformation with more detail. See Hardware (page 152) .

This page provides details of any problems with hardware items. Select an item in the list and clickon the Details button for more information. The page is blank if there are no hardware problems.

TIP: Hardware problems are indicated in various places, such as the overall Status icons,StoreOnce, Hardware, and Events pages, but it is not always easy to identify the lower-levelhardware item(s) that need investigation or action. This page identifies the exact location of thehardware item.

Table 42 Hardware problem report parametersDescriptionField

The status of the hardware item, which may be warning, failure, down, or degraded.This list may be sorted alphabetically. Entries will have one of two icons: a red box witha white X through it for failed and down, and a yellow triangle with a ! in it for all others.

Status

The type of hardware item.Type

The exact location of the hardware item in a name format. For example, this helps youlocate a failed/failing disk or a network port that is causing problems.

Hardware Item Location

Hardware problem detailsThis dialog shows the details for all the recorded hardware elements, statuses, and diagnosticmessages.

150 Hardware Problem and Storage Reporting



Storage ReportThis page provides details about the storage space usage. It shows free space and used space,

which added together make up the total storage space. It also shows user data written and thededuplication ratio.

Table 43 Storage report parameters

DescriptionFieldThe total capacity of available and used space.Total Capacity

The amount of free space available.Free Space

The amount of space that has been used.Used Space

The amount of user data that has been written.User Data Written

The deduplication ratio.Deduplication Ratio

Storage Report 151



10 HardwareThis page provides a tree hierarchy which allows the user to monitor the status of installed hardwarecomponents.The layout of the Hardware tree varies depending on the StoreOnce model.• StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700, and 4900: There are two top-level items; one for the

server and one for the storage.• StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220 and 4420/4430. See HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220

and 4420/4430 Hardware tree (page 158) .To navigate the hardware tree:• The + sign indicates there are lower-level elements associated with an item; click to expand

the hierarchy.• Select an item in the hierarchy to view its details.• Use the drop-down lists in each column to control the sort order of the items (ascending or

descending alphabetically). Use the Columns item to display what information may be viewedfor the item and which columns are currently selected.

NOTE: If any element within the Hardware tree has a warning or an error status, that status willbe rolled up through the tree, with the appropriate icon displayed from the top level downwards.This makes it easier to locate the hardware item that is causing the problem.

Hardware element fieldsThe top-level Hardware page ( Hardware Information) has the fields described in the followingtable. If a field is not relevant for a particular element, it is left blank. Lower level items in theHardware hierarchy have a sub-set of these fields. Where appropriate, lower-level items also havea Location field that identifies where the item is located, for example which PCI slot or which diskbay. This field is particularly useful for troubleshooting and storage expansion.

ValueName

The device ID, HP StoreOnce.Dev ID

The serial number.

NOTE: When contacting HP Support on warranty issues:HP StoreOnce 2700, 2900, and 4500: Use the serial number found on theHP StoreOnce page of the GUI.HP StoreOnce 4700 and 4900: Use the serial number found on the labelsand/or toe tags that come with the product.

Serial Number

The unique ID, normally the same as the device ID.UUID

152 Hardware



ValueName

The firmware version of the hardware element.Firmware Version

The hardware component name for external reference, for example MemoryModule.

Name

The type, for example DIMM for a Memory Module.Type

The vendor, for example HP for the server but unspecified for the temperaturesensors within it.

Vendor

The system name, which is only relevant at the top level of Hardware.System Name

The Status of the element, useful for troubleshooting to identify elements thatare down or degraded.

Status

The worst status of the components in the hierarchy below this item. If there isa fault, drill down into the lower elements in the hierarchy to get further

Rolled Up Status

information. If alerting and SNMP have been enabled, messages will be sentto you automatically identifying the source of the problem.

Contains any diagnostic messages.Diagnostic Messages

Varies according to the hardware element. Additional Properties

Monitoring the StoreOnce Backup serverThe server hardware structure is not identical for all models. The examples shown below relate toHP StoreOnce HP 4900 Backup systems. Where appropriate, differences are noted below.

NOTE: If you are using an HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220, or 4420/4430 backup system,see server information at “Monitoring the HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220 and 4420/4430server” (page 158).

Monitoring the StoreOnce Backup server 153



The following installed hardware components are included under the tree hierarchy for the server.If the Status or Rolled Up Status is Down or Degraded, look at the Diagnostic Messages for moredetails.

DescriptionName

Central processing unitCPU

Appliance fansFans

This is the Fibre Channel card in slot 2. Expand to see Portsinformation for this Fibre Channel card, but be aware that

HBA (PCI-E Slot 2)

when you select ports for library creation on the StoreOnceGUI, Port 1 on this card translates to Port 1 on the GUI;Port 2 on this card translates to Port 3 on the GUI .

154 Hardware



DescriptionName

This is the Fibre Channel card in slot 3. Expand to see Portsinformation for this Fibre Channel card, but be aware that

HBA (PCI-E Slot 3)

when you select ports for library creation on the StoreOnceGUI, Port 1 on this card translates to Port 2 on the GUI;Port 2 on this card translates to Port 4 on the GUI.

Integrated Lights-Out embedded server managementiLO Modules

Dual In-line memory moduleMemory DIMMsThese are the 1GbE ports. Expand Ports to map physicalports to eth0, eth1, eth2 and eth3.

NIC 1

This is the 10GbE card in PCI-E slot 6. Expand Ports tomap physical ports to eth4 and eth5.

NIC 2

This is the 10GbE card in PCI-E slot 5. Expand Ports tomap physical ports to eth6 and eth7.

NIC 3

The number of items depends upon how network bondswere configured at installation.

bond0 to n

The PMCs perform the powering up and powering downof the processor

Power Management Controllers

Power supplies for the appliancePower Supplies

These are the disks within the head server that contain theoperating and file system; these disks are not used for data

Server Storage

storage except on the HP StoreOnce 2700 and 2900.Expand to see status information about the disks underDrive Enclosure, RAID information under Pool and Volumes,and the Storage Controller which is the P420 Smart Arrayon the motherboard.

This is the RAID controller card in slot 1. The Name andUUID information is used to map the storage controller to

Storage Controller (PCI Slot 1)

the appropriate drawer/disk enclosure in the Storage

Clusters section of the Hardware tree. This entry alsocontains information about the status of the cache moduleand super capacitor and the SAS ports on this RAIDcontroller card that connect to the drawer in the diskenclosure.

This is the RAID controller card in slot 4. The Name andUUID information is used to map the storage controller to

Storage Controller (PCI Slot 4)

the appropriate disk enclosure in the Storage Clusterssection of the Hardware tree. This entry also containsinformation about the status of the cache module and supercapacitor and the SAS ports on this RAID controller cardthat connect to the drawer in the disk enclosure.

Provide temperature monitoringTemperature sensors

If VLAN subnets have been configured on the system, the VLAN tags that have been used are listed here.

VLAN

NOTE: HP StoreOnce 2700, 4500, and 4700 Backup systems only: The Server Storage andStorage Controller elements are found under the Storage section of the Hardware tree and not inthe Server section.

Monitoring the StoreOnce Backup server 155



Differences between systems• The number of NIC entries may vary depending upon the hardware in the product. Some

systems have no 10GbE cards.• The number of HBA items will vary according to the Backup system.

Monitoring the storage

NOTE: The storage hardware structure is not identical for all models. The terminology andelements shown on the Storage Cluster section of the Hardware tree may be slightly differentdepending upon the model that you are using.If you are using an HP 2620, 4210/4220, and 4420/4430 backup system, see “Monitoring theSmartArray controller” (page 159).

This section contains a list of storage clusters.Each storage cluster contains the following items:• Drive Enclosures• Pools• Controllers

Drive enclosuresHP StoreOnce 4900

156 Hardware



There is an entry for each storage controller and associated disk enclosure.Expand this item to see information about the power supplies and the two sub enclosures (drawers)associated with each disk enclosure.Expand the sub enclosure (drawer) item to view status and location information for I/O Modules,disks, fans, and temperature sensors within a drawer. When expanding storage, you will need tocheck what disks are already installed in a drawer to determine the correct drawer and bay locationto install additional disks. Additional disks must always be installed in the correct sequence; referto the Capacity Expansion guide supplied with the HP StoreOnce 4900 (44TB) and (60TB)expansion kits for detailed instructions.HP StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, and 4700 Backup systemsThere is always one enclosure for the internal storage.If the model supports additional enclosures, each installed shelf will be listed.• HP StoreOnce 2700 Backup cannot be expanded.• HP StoreOnce 2900 Backup supports the addition of a further six 4 TB disks in to bays 7-12

of the appliance server. It does not support additional enclosures.• HP StoreOnce 4500 Backup supports the addition of up to three expansion enclosures; these

may contain 12 x 2TB or 12 x 4TB disks. The 48TB capacity expansion enclosure includes ahot spare disk in Slot 12, when not in use its LED indicators will be off and it will show as aspare disk in the Hardware tree.

• HP StoreOnce 4700 Backup has one storage enclosure in the base configuration and supportsthe addition of up to seven expansion enclosures. The head server node has two small formfactor disks which contain the operating system.

The following installed hardware components are included under the tree hierarchy for eachenclosure. (The head unit on the HP 4700 has only a Drive component.)• Drive: the physical hard disks (see also Drives (enclosure))• Fan•

I/O module• Power Supply• Temperature Module

PoolsThe number of pools shown depends on the base storage and the number of capacity expansionkits installed.• HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup systems: There may be up to six pools for each storage cluster,

each with its own Volumes sub-element. For example, Pool C1_P1 relates to the base storageattached to the RAID controller in Slot 1. Pool C1_P3 relates to the storage from the second

44TB expansion that has been added to this disk enclosure. On the second disk enclosure,the naming follows the same convention, but it is now C4, rather than C1, because the storageis connected to the RAID controller in Slot 4.

• HP StoreOnce 2700, 4500, and 4700 Backup systems: There is one volume per pool.• HP StoreOnce 2900 systems: There are two volumes per pool.

ControllersThis confirms the controller information for the controller card associated with the storage cluster.The name of the controller links back to the Storage Controller item in the Server section of theHardware tree.

Monitoring the storage 157



The following installed hardware components are included under the tree hierarchy for each storagecontroller.• I/O cache module• Port• Super Capacitor

NOTE: Information about the storage that is integral to the head server and the storage controller

is included under the Server section of the Hardware tree.

Drives (enclosure)This page provides details about the status of the hard disks within the head unit or enclosure. Thestatus is either Good or Failed.This page also provides buttons to switch the disk's Beacon LED on and off.See Replacing a hard disk in a disk enclosure (page 236) for information about replacing a faileddisk.Table 44 Button functions on hard disk pages

DescriptionButtonUse this button to turn the Beacon LED of the selected disk on. This makes it easier toidentify a failed or failing disk in an enclosure for replacement.

Turn Beacon LED On

Use this button to turn the Beacon LED of the selected disk off.Turn Beacon LED Off

HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220, and 4420/4430 hardware treeThe Hardware tree contains two main elements:• Server: See “Monitoring the HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220 and 4420/4430 server”

(page 158) .•

SA, which is the Smart Array controller and associated storage: See “Monitoring the SmartArraycontroller” (page 159).The rolled-up status of all components is reported as either Good or Degraded. If the status isDegraded, drill down into the individual components for more information or use the HardwareProblem Report to identify the faulty component.

Monitoring the HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220 and 4420/4430 serverThe following installed hardware components are included under the tree hierarchy for the server.The number of each item displayed varies according to the model of StoreOnce Backup system.If the Status or Rolled Up Status is Down or Degraded, look at the Diagnostic Messages for moredetails.

DescriptionName

The temperature sensorsnode_temp_x

The CPUsnode_cpu_x

eth0/1 refers to the 1GbE ports; HP StoreOnce 4420/4430 Backupsystems also have eth2/3 (unused 1 GbE ports) and eth4/5, the 10GbEports

node_eth_x

The fansnode_fan_x

The HBA host (the FC ports)node_hba_host_x

158 Hardware



DescriptionName

The memorynode_memory_x

The PSU(s)node_psu_x

Monitoring the SA controller for StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220, and 4420/4430This section contains a list of the SA (Smart Array) RAID controllers. The number corresponds tothe slot location in the server.The following installed hardware components are included under the tree hierarchy for the RAIDcontroller:• sa_battery_cap: battery capacitor• sa_cache: cache module• sa_enclosure_x: the enclosureThe rolled up status of all controller components is reported as either Good or Degraded. If thestatus is Degraded, drill down into the individual components for more information or use theHardware Problem Report to identify the faulty component.

HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220, and 4420/4430 hardware tree 159



EnclosureThere is always one enclosure for the internal storage.If the model supports additional shelves, each installed shelf will be listed.• HP StoreOnce 2620 Backup cannot be expanded.• HP StoreOnce 4210/4220 Backup supports the addition of one extra shelf. The head shelf

is identified as Internal.•

HP StoreOnce 4420/4430 Backup supports the addition of up to three extra shelves. Thehead shelf is identified as Internal. The extra shelves are identified by their port number.The following installed hardware components are included under the tree hierarchy for eachenclosure:• sa_physical_disk_<enclosure no>_<slot location>: the physical hard disks (see also Drives

(enclosure)).• sa_raidset_<enclosure no>: RAIDset, one for each enclosure, containing the logical drive,

which shows the configured physical storage. This is useful when expanding storage.The page also provides buttons to switch the enclosure's Beacon LED on and off.

160 Hardware



11 HP Remote SupportOverview

HP Remote Support monitors your StoreOnce appliance and allows the appliance to proactivelycontact HP if issues arise on the system. All major (an Alert in the event log) and minor (a Warningin the event log) hardware events generate an alert that is sent to the customer-specified user and

to HP Support. This alert automatically opens a support case. Generally, these alerts indicate thathardware should be replaced. HP Support can then quickly ship replacement parts to ensureoptimal performance and availability. This feature requires a proxy server path to the internet sothe appliance can communicate to HP Support. Alerts are transmitted over the firewall-friendly por443.

NOTE: HP recommends entering the entitlement serial and product numbers even if you do notintend to use HP Remote Support. The numbers are saved with the configuration and can be restoredwhen the configuration is restored.

General procedure for setting up Remote Support on the StoreOnce GUIRemote Support is a standard feature that is enabled and available to all users. Refer to the HP StoreOnce Backup system user guide for more information, including example screenshots.If you do not configure Remote Support, you will be prompted to do so every time you log ontothe HP StoreOnce GUI. To prevent this, you should go to the Remote Support pages on theStoreOnce GUI and either configure it, or select No Support, as appropriate.

NOTE: The examples in this section are generic; they are not intended to be product specific,merely to illustrate the overall procedure.

1. Go to the Remote Support pages of the StoreOnce GUI.2. Click Modify. Select Passive: Automatically send log files to HP and provide the details for the

proxy server that enables internet access for Remote Support. If required for the networkenvironment, check the Enable Authentication box and provide authentication name andpassword details. Click OK .

NOTE: Details for the Enterprise Server (the server that will receive the event messages) areprovided by the StoreOnce Backup system and should not be edited.

3. Select Customer Information. Click Modify and enter technical contact details for the customersite. HP Support will use this information to provide feedback and instructions on resolvingany issues. Information is required for all fields marked with an asterisk.

4. Select Server .

NOTE: For some models, the Customer Entered Serial Number is updated automatically andcannot be edited. If you do need to enter the value, continue as follows, and remember thatit is the warranty serial number that is required.

Overview 161



5. Write down the serial number that Remote Support says it has. (This is greyed out and is2M233601JG in our example, shown in the red box below. This is NOT the warranty serialnumber.)

TIP: The following products consist of a single component and the component serial numbercan simply be copied into the Customer Entered Serial Number field. Then go to step 10.• HP StoreOnce 2700 Backup, BB877A• HP StoreOnce 2900 Backup, BB910A• HP StoreOnce 4500 Backup, BB878A• HP StoreOnce 4500/4700 24 TB Capacity Expansion, BB881A• HP StoreOnce 4500 48 TB Capacity Expansion, BB909A• HP StoreOnce 4900 Capacity Expansion, BB904A

6. Go to the StoreOnce Backup system and search for the component that has the sticker thatmatches the serial number - this is the piece of hardware to which Remote Support is referring.Instructions for locating these numbers on specific products can be found in the followingsections. The following is an example server component sticker. Note that the Product Numberis in a 9-digit numerical format. This is not a StoreOnce product number.

Figure 9 Example component serial number

7. On that same piece of hardware, locate the warranty serial tag. This is also on a label, whichmay have a number of different layouts. The key thing is that the Product number is in a6-character format, that matches one of the StoreOnce product names described in the nextsections.

162 HP Remote Support



Table 45 Example StoreOnce warranty labels

HP StoreOnce 4700

HP StoreOnce 4900

HP StoreOnce 4500

8. Go back to the StoreOnce GUI, click Modify and enter this warranty serial number into theServer page under Customer entered serial number . Also enter the Product Number in Customer Entered Product Number .

9. If you have a product where several components are bundled together under the sameStoreOnce Product number, you can enter exactly the same details on the relevant pages. Forexample, the server head and initial storage for the HP StoreOnce 4900 or 4700 have thesame Product Number and Serial Number for warranty purposes.

10. Repeat this process to identify additional storage products and provide their warranty serialnumbers on the appropriate Remote Support pages. If you cannot see all storage enclosures,click Rescan devices.

General procedure for setting up Remote Support on the StoreOnce GUI 163



Figure 10 Example label with storage warranty details

11. Select Status to confirm that everything has been configured. There should not be an X againstany field on the screen.

NOTE: A missing serial number will prevent a test event being sent.

12. Click Send Test Event on the Remote Support page.13. Call HP support and ask to verify a remote support event has been received.

The HP Support person will check on the database portal that the event has been receivedand will also verify that warranty/serial/part numbers are valid and under warranty (or havevalid care packs).

This completes Remote Support verification.

Locating warranty info - HP 4900Table 46 Warranty details for HP StoreOnce 4900 models

Customer entered serial number Customer entered productnumber Product description

Is the same for both the server and first storageenclosure. Locate it by looking at the labels:Either at the front right and back of the server

BB903A for server and firststorage enclosure

HP StoreOnce 4900, consists ofa server and storage enclosure

Or the back left and back of the first storageenclosure

Can be found on the back left of the unitBB904A Additional 4900 storageenclosure




Figure 11 HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup bundled warranty serial numbers

Product Name on GUIDescription

ProLiant DL380p Gen8head server (BB903A)1

drive enclosure D6000first disk enclosure (BB903A)2

drive enclosure D6000additional disk enclosure (BB904A)3

This means that Items 1 and 2 have the same warranty serial number; the additional enclosure has a different warrantyserial number. Note that the 11–disk capacity expansion kits (BB908A) do not currently have their own warranty serialnumber; details cannot be recorded for these expansion kits on the StoreOnce GUI.


Customer entered serial number Customer entered product number Product description

Is the same for both the server and first storageenclosure. Locate it by looking at the labels:Either at the front right and back of the server

BB879A for server and firststorage array

HP StoreOnce 4700, consists ofa server and storage array

Or the back left and back of the first storageenclosure

Can be found on a sticker on the back left of theunit. Each array has a unique warranty serialnumber.

BB881A for each additionalstorage arrays

Additional 4700 storage arrays

General procedure for setting up Remote Support on the StoreOnce GUI 165







ProLiant DL380p Gen8head server (2 x OS + 10 x storage disks)(BB878A)

1

D2600additional 12–disk storage arrays (BB881A orBB909A)2 to 4

This means that the head server and all storage arrays have a unique warranty serial number.


Customer entered serial number Customer entered product number Product description

Can be found on a sticker at the front left of theserver.

BB877AHP StoreOnce 2700, consists ofa server with 4 disks



ProLiant DL360p Gen 8head server with storage (BB877A)1

Locating warranty info — HP 2900

The base HP StoreOnce 2900 model, BB910A, consists of a server with 6 disks. The warrantydetails required for the Customer entered serial number are read from BIOS, so that the Server page is populated automatically. The customer does not need to carry out any further action. ACapacity Upgrade kit containing a further six disks, BB911A, is available, but this is not recordedon the Remote Support pages.

HP Remote Support pageThe HP Remote Support page allows you to view the level of remote support and the proxy settingsused to connect to the external network:• Support Level — The level of support configured. Options are Active, Passive, or No Support.• Enterprise Server — The IP address of the server that receives event messages.

HP Remote Support page 167



• Proxy — The IP address of the proxy server that connects to the Internet (if enabled).• Protocol — The network protocol being used by the proxy server (if enabled).• Port — The port used by the proxy server (if enabled).• Login ID — The username used if authentication is enabled.

After completing the required fields on the information pages, click Send Test Event to test theconnection of the remote support configuration. A message appears indicating whether or not the

test event was generated; contact HP Support to determine if the test event was received by HP.

Configuring and modifying HP Remote Support1. Click Modify on the HP Remote Support page.2. Enter or edit the appropriate information. The required fields are indicated with a red asterisk

and red field outline. See Table 50 (page 169) for an explanation of the fields.3. Click OK .




Table 50 HP Remote Support fields

DescriptionField

The level of support configured on the StoreOnce appliance:HP Remote SupportLevel • Active – Allows HP to control and send commands to the appliance. This level of support

will be available in an upcoming release.• Passive (default) – Allows events to be sent out but does not permit inbound queries.• No support – No events are sent out and does not permit inbound queries (HP Remote

Support is disabled).

The server that will receive the event messages. This is automatically populated and should notbe changed unless you have a specific reason to do so.

Enterprise Server

If you select Yes, HP and partners may contact you to discuss optimisation options for yourstorage system based on alerts and log file data that is sent with HP Remote Support. If you

By selecting yes, HPand partners may

select No, HP and partners will not contact you based on the data sent back from HP Remotecontact you to discussSupport. If you select No, HP will continue to contact you for support as needed, based on theevents sent with HP Remote Support.

optimisation optionsfor your storagesystem based on alertsand log file data.

If selected, this option allows the use of a network proxy to access the Internet.Enable proxy serverfor HP Remote Support

The protocol used by the proxy server.Protocol

The address of the proxy server. Address

The port used by the proxy server.Port

Configuring and modifying HP Remote Support 169



Table 50 HP Remote Support fields (continued)

DescriptionField

If selected, the proxy network requires a username and password. The Login ID, Password,and Re-enter Password fields display when Enable Authentication is selected. Clear this fieldif authorization is not required to access the proxy.

Enable Authentication

The user name used to access the proxy server.Login ID

The password used to access the proxy server.Password

Re-enter the password for initial verification.Re-enter Password

NOTE: If HP Remote Support is not fully configured, a reminder message is displayed at login.The message appears at every login until the configuration is completed or until no support isselected.

Customer Information pageThe Customer Information page displays the information of the person who should be contactedwhen HP Remote Support indicates that a support case is needed.

Entering and modifying customer information1. Click Modify on the Customer Information page.2. Enter or edit the contact information. The required fields are indicated with a red asterisk and

red field outline.3. Use the Support From menu to select who will provide the support: HP Direct or HP Partner .

If you select HP Direct, enter the HP Passport ID in the appropriate field. If you select HP Partner ,enter the Partner ID in the appropriate field.

4. Click OK .




Server pageThe Server page displays the entitlement (warranty) serial and product numbers for the serversconfigured for HP Remote Support.Click Rescan Devices for the system to discover newly added servers, then add the entitlement serialand product numbers of the new servers.

Entering and modifying entitlement information for the server1. Click Modify on the Server page.2. Enter or edit the appropriate information. See Table 51 (page 171) for field descriptions.3. Click OK .

Table 51 Server Entitlement fields

DescriptionField

The name of the IP or Host is automatically populated.IP/Host Name

The name of the HP StoreOnce appliance receiving HPRemote Support is automatically populated.

Product Name

The serial number of the HP StoreOnce appliance receivingHP Remote Support is automatically populated.

Serial Number

The product number of the HP StoreOnce appliancereceiving HP Remote Support is automatically populated.

Product Number

The serial number of the selected component that you mustenter from the warranty tag on the device. (On a newsystem, this is populated automatically.)

Customer Entered Serial Number

Server page 171



Table 51 Server Entitlement fields (continued)

DescriptionField

The product number of the selected component that youmust enter from the warranty tag on the device.

Customer Entered Product Number

Select either SAID or CarePackID if you purchased one ofthese extended warranties for the HP StoreOnce applianceor hardware components.

Entitlement Type

The ID of the Entitlement agreement.Entitlement IDNot intended for this release. Leave blank.Custom Delivery ID

Storage pageThe Storage page displays the entitlement (warranty) serial and product numbers for the storageexpansion kits (if present) configured for HP Remote Support.Click Rescan Devices for the system to discover newly added expansion kits, and then add theentitlement serial and product numbers of the new couplets.

Entering and modifying entitlement information for storage expansions1. Click Modify on the Storage page.2. Enter or edit the appropriate information. See Table 52 (page 173) for field descriptions.3. Click OK .




Table 52 Storage Entitlement fields

DescriptionField


The name of the HP StoreOnce appliance receiving HPRemote Support is automatically populated.

Product Name


Serial Number


Product Number

The serial number of the selected component that you mustenter from the warranty tag on the device.


The product number of the selected component that youmust enter from the warranty tag on the device.


Select either SAID or CarePackID if you purchased one ofthese extended warranties for the HP StoreOnce applianceor hardware components.

Entitlement Type

The ID of the Entitlement agreement.Entitlement ID

Not intended for this release. Leave blank.Custom Delivery ID

Switch pageThe Switch page displays the entitlement (warranty) serial and product numbers for the switchesconfigured for HP Remote Support.Click Rescan Devices for the system to discover newly added switches, and then add the entitlementserial and product numbers of the new switches.

Entering and modifying entitlement information for switches

1. Click Modify on the Switch page.2. Enter or edit the appropriate information. See Table 53 (page 174) for field descriptions.3. Click OK .

Switch page 173



Table 53 Switch Entitlement fields

DescriptionField


The name of the HP StoreOnce appliance receiving HPRemote Support is automatically populated.Product Name


Serial Number


Product Number

The serial number of the selected component that you mustenter from the warranty tag on the device.


The part number of the selected component that you mustenter from the warranty tag on the device.


Select either SAID or CarePackID if you purchased one ofthese extended warranties for the HP StoreOnce Backupappliance or hardware components.

Entitlement Type

The ID of the Entitlement agreement.Entitlement ID

Not intended for this release. Leave blank.Custom Delivery ID

Status pageThe Status page displays the HP Remote Support availability status of the proxy and enterpriseservers, indicates if the product models and hardware product numbers have been entered, andindicates if the device is registered successfully. A red icon indicates a problem with one of these




statuses. In addition, a warning appears in red at the bottom of the page if there is a problem withthe feature.

Table 54 Status page fields

DescriptionField

Indicates the status level of registration featureLevel

Describes the item and statusMessage

Status page 175



12 Reporting CentralReporting central allows you to view the status, throughput and storage details of local and remoteHP StoreOnce appliances. You can create groups of either appliances or virtual devices and thenrun reports that pull data from these groups.To use reporting central, you will need to do the following:

• Register any appliance you want to pull reports for. See “Appliance registration” (page 176)• Configure groups containing registered appliances and their devices. See “Group

configuration” (page 180)• Run reports using the configured groups of appliances and virtual devices. See “Reports”

(page 187)The Reporting Central page allows you to quickly view a snapshot of the status and capacity usageof registered appliances.

NOTE: Appliances that are in the Unknown state do not contribute to the file system usage total,the bar graphs, or the deduplication ratio shown on this page, even though the appliances arelisted as monitored appliances.

Appliance registration“Appliance” refers to an HP StoreOnce Backup system. You can use your local appliance to monitorand view reports for remote appliances. You first need to register any remote appliance that youwant to see data for in Reporting Central.

Please see the following topics for more information:• “Registering an appliance” (page 177)• “Modify appliance details” (page 179)• “Unregister appliance” (page 179)• “Import certificates” (page 178)

176 Reporting Central



Registering an applianceBefore you can generate reports for an appliance other than the local appliance, you must registerthat appliance and import the SSL certificate from either the appliance or the certification authority(CA).If you installed an SSL certificate on your HP StoreOnce appliances that was obtained from a CA,you only need to import the CA certificate (not the SSL certificates) to Reporting Central. If youhave not installed an SSL certificate from a CA, you must import the self-signed certificate of eachappliance you wish to register and generate reports for in Reporting Central.

After completing the steps in this procedure, you must also complete the following procedures tofinalize appliance registration:• “Exporting a certificate” (page 178)• “Import certificates” (page 178)To add your appliance to Reporting Central:1. On your local HP StoreOnce appliance, navigate to the Appliance Registration page, and

click Register .2. Enter the following details to register your HP StoreOnce appliance.

DescriptionField name

Enter your appliance’s IP address in this required field. Appliance Address

Select one, depending on your entry in the IP addressfield.

IPv4/IPv6 or FQDN

• IPv4/IPv6: Internet Protocol Version 4 or Version 6• FQDN: Fully Qualified Domain name

Appliance registration 177




Enter the user name. This must be an account on theremote appliance that can log into the GUI and CLI. The

User Name

account credentials will be used by Reporting Centralto log into the remote appliance and retrieve theinformation required to generate the reports.

Enter the password associated with the user nameabove.

Password

Enter an identifiable name for your appliance. Alias

3. Click OK .4. To continue appliance registration, go to “Exporting a certificate” (page 178).

Exporting a certificateExport the SSL certificate from your remote appliance for use in completing your applianceregistration with your local HP StoreOnce backup system.To export a cerficate:1. In a new browser, log in to the StoreOnce Management Console (GUI) for the remote appliance

you are registering.2. Navigate to Device Configuration>User Interface>SSL certificate.3. Click Export Certificate.4. In the Export Certificate dialog box, click Download. You will see a dialog box that says the

export file is calledfusion.export.crt has been placed in the ftp location.5. Click OK .6. Open an FTP session (use your preferred FTP client) using administrator user credentials.7. Enter the IP of the HP StoreOnce remote appliance you are registering and the administrator

user name and password.8. Navigate to the /repository folder where you will find the exported certificate (the

fusion.export.crt file).9. Copy the certificate from the StoreOnce appliance to your local drive and close your FTP

session.10. Rename the file using the IP address and a name for the appliance (such as,

11.22.123.23_RemoteApplianceA). Use the same name for this file and the appliance Aliasthat you entered at registration for easy identification.

11. To complete appliance registration, continue to “Import certificates” (page 178).

Import certificatesYour local StoreOnce appliance needs a copy of the SSL certificate for any remote appliance you

are registering. The SSL certificate allows the local appliance to confirm that the remote applianceit is accessing is indeed a StoreOnce appliance.To import the certificates:1. Open an FTP session (use your preferred FTP client) to your local StoreOnce appliance.2. Copy the renamed certificates from your local drive to the StoreOnce appliance/repository

folder using administrator user credentials.3. Return to your local StoreOnce appliance Management Console.4. Navigate to Reporting Central Appliance Registration.




5. Click Import Certificate.

6. Enter a certificate Alias and then enter the file name of one of the certificates. Your certificatealias should use the same name as the file/your appliance alias.

7. Click OK .8. Import all other certificates using Import Certificate.9. After all certificates have been imported, reboot the local appliance. If you do not reboot,

registration will not complete for the remote appliance and the appliance will be added tothe Reporting Central main page under Appliances in an Unknown State. You will not be ableto run a report that includes this appliance until you reboot.

Modify appliance detailsTo modify appliance details:1. On the Appliance Registration page, select the appliance you would like to modify. The Alias

and IP addresses of all registered appliances appear on this page.2. Click Modify.

3. Update the appliance details as needed. See “Registering an appliance” (page 177) for moreinformation about the fields in this dialog box.

4. Click OK .

Unregister appliance

To unregister an appliance: Appliance registration 179



1. On the Appliance Registration page, select the appliance you would like to unregister. The Alias and IP addresses of all registered appliances appear on this page.

2. Click Unregister . You will see the IP address of the appliance you have selected.

3. When you click OK , all details for this appliance in appliance groups and all virtual devices

in virtual device groups will be removed.NOTE: Devices on this appliance that were added to device groups may still appear in thedevice group list, as Unable to connect. See “Removing a device from a device group”(page 187) to remove these devices.

Group configurationThe Group Configuration page displays a snapshot of configured groups:• Appliance Groups: Shows appliance group names and the number of appliances within each

group• Device Groups: Shows device group names, group descriptions, and the number of libraries,shares, and StoreOnce Catalyst stores in each group

To manage appliance and device groups:• “Appliances” (page 180)• “Virtual devices” (page 183)

AppliancesIn the upper pane of the Appliance Groups page, under Group Name, you will see a list ofconfigured appliance groups. Each entry will contain the appliance group name and the numberof appliances in that group.To manage appliance groups, see:• “Creating an appliance group” (page 181)• “Modifying an appliance group” (page 182)• “Deleting an appliance group” (page 183)




To view more information about a particular group, click the group name in the top pane. Thelower pane will display details about all of the appliances included in the group.

Lower pane fields

DescriptionField

The registered IP address of the appliance. Appliance address

The serial number of the appliance.Serial number

The amount of user data stored on the appliance in GB.User data stored

The actual size on disk after deduplication in GB.Size on disk

The amount of free space available on the appliance inGB.

Free space

The full capacity of the appliance in GB.Capacity

The status of the appliance:Status• Running: The appliance has some jobs currently running,

which could be backup/restore or replication.• Online: The appliance has no jobs currently running,

and is available for backup/restore or replication.• Unknown: Appliance registration for the appliance

containing the device has not been completed.• Unable to connect: A connection to the remote

appliance cannot be made. This could be due to theremote appliance rebooting or shut down, networkconnectivity issues, or invalid credentials.

• Fault: Appliance is in a fault condition

Creating an appliance groupYou can create groups of appliances for use when running reports.To create an appliance group:

Group configuration 181



1. On the Appliance Groups page, select Create.

2. Enter a name for the group.3. Select the appliances you would like to monitor within this group.4. Click OK .

Modifying an appliance groupTo modify an appliance group:1. On the Appliance Groups page, under Group Name, select the appliance group you want to

modify.2. Click Modify.




3. Modify the group details as needed. You can change the group name, and remove or addappliances.

4. Click OK .

Deleting an appliance groupTo delete an appliance group:1. On the Appliance Groups page, under Group Name, select the appliance group you want to

delete.2. Click Delete.3. Verify that the group name listed in the dialog box is the one you want to delete.

4. Click OK . This group will no longer be available for use in running reports.

Virtual devices“Virtual devices” refers to any virtual tape libraries, NAS shares, or StoreOnce Catalyst stores thatare configured on the StoreOnce appliances you have registered. When you register your appliance,the virtual devices configured on your appliances can be added to device groups in order to run

reports that include these devices.The Virtual Devices page displays the list of virtual device groups and the virtual devices withinthe groups.To view more information about a particular group, click the group name in the top pane. Thelower pane will display details about all of the virtual devices included in the group.To manage virtual device groups, see:• “Creating or modifying a virtual device group” (page 184)• “Deleting a virtual device group” (page 186)• “Removing a device from a device group” (page 187)




Upper pane fields

DescriptionField

The name assigned when the virtual device group wascreated.

Group name

The description provided when the virtual device groupwas created.

Description

The number of libraries contained in the virtual devicegroup. This number is derived from a combination of alllibraries in the group.

Number of libraries

The number of shares contained in the virtual device group.This number is derived from a combination of all shares inthe group.

Number of shares

The number of StoreOnce Catalyst stores contained in thevirtual device group. This number is derived from acombination of all StoreOnce Catalyst stores in the group.

Number of Catalyst stores

Lower pane fields

DescriptionField

The name of the device.Device name

The type of device: StoreOnce Catalyst, NAS share, or VTL

Device type

The amount of user data stored in GB.User data stored

The size on disk of the device in GB.Size on disk

The status of the device:Status• Running: The device has some jobs currently running,

which could be backup/restore or replication.• Online: The device has no jobs currently running, and

is available for backup/restore or replication.• Unknown: Appliance registration for the appliance

containing the device has not been completed.• Unable to connect: A connection to the remote

appliance cannot be made. This could be due to theremote appliance rebooting or shut down, networkconnectivity issues, or invalid credentials.

• Failed to start: Device has failed to start replication.• Fault: Device has a fault condition.

The IP address of the appliance hosting the device. Appliance address

N/A or any number up to 8, depending on how manycouplets are represented on the device.

Service set

Creating or modifying a virtual device groupUse the Create or Modify buttons to create or modify a virtual device group. These buttons opena wizard to assist with the process.To continue with the wizard, see:• “Entering or modifying group details” (page 185)• “Adding or modifying libraries ” (page 185)




• “Adding or modifying shares” (page 185)• “Adding or modifying StoreOnce Catalyst stores” (page 186)

Entering or modifying group detailsTo enter or modify group details:1. At the entry screen for the wizard, click Next.2. On the Group Details screen, enter a group name and a group description. Create a meaningful

name and description so you can easily identify your group. Enter a phone number or emailaddress so that if an administrator needs to make changes to your group, they can contactyou.

3. Click Next.

Adding or modifying librariesThe libraries available for adding to your group are a combination of the libraries that were createdon all registered appliances.To select the libraries to be included in your virtual group:1. In the Add Libraries screen, select the libraries you want to include in your group. You will

see the appliance address that is associated with each library.

2. To add a library, click the library and then click > to move the library to the right pane, SelectedLibraries. If you want to include all libraries in your reports, click >>. To remove a library,click the specific library and click < to move the library out of the Selected Libraries list. Youcan also use << to move all items out of the Selected Libraries list.

3. Click Next.

Adding or modifying sharesTo select the shares to be included in your group:




1. In the Add Shares screen, select the shares you want to include in your group. You will seethe appliance name or address that is associated with each share.

2. To add a share, click the share and then click > to move the share to the right pane, SelectedShares. If you want to include all shares in your reports, click >>. To remove a share, clickthe specific library and click < to move the share out of the Selected Shares list. You can alsouse << to move all items out of the Selected Shares list.

3. Click Next.

Adding or modifying StoreOnce Catalyst storesTo select the StoreOnce Catalyst stores to be included in your group:1. In the Catalyst Stores screen, select the stores you want to include in your group. You will see

the appliance name or address that is associated with each store.For StoreOnce Federated Catalyst stores, you will see two entries, one for each service set.

2. To add a store, click the store and then click > to move the store to the right pane, SelectedCatalyst Stores. If you want to include all stores in your reports, click >>. To remove a store,click the specific store and click < to move the store out of the Selected Catalyst Stores list.You can also use << to move all items out of the Selected Catalyst Stores list.

3. Click Finish. You have completed creating or modifying your virtual device group.Deleting a virtual device group

To delete a virtual device group:1. On the Device Groups page, in the upper pane, select the group you want to delete.




2. In the Delete Device Group dialog box, verify that you have selected the correct device group.

3. Click OK . This group will no longer be available for use in running reports.

Removing a device from a device group After you unregister an appliance, the devices related to that appliance may still appear on theDevice Groups page in any device groups they were added to. Their status will display as Unableto connect. In addition, the User Data Stored and Size on Disk columns will display ”—”. You mustmanually remove devices related to an unregistered appliance from configured groups.

IMPORTANT: In order to identify the devices that need to be removed, you will need to log in tothe remote appliance that you unregistered, and note which devices are related to this appliance.

To remove a device from a device group:Procedure 21. On the Appliance Groups page, check that the appliance you unregistered is no longer listed.2. Click Virtual Devices.3. Click Modify.4. At the entry screen for the wizard, click Next.5. In the Modify Libraries screen, select the library you want to remove in the Selected Libraries

window. Click < to move the selected library to the other window. Repeat for any additionallibraries you need to remove from device groups.

6. In the Modify Shares screen, select the share you want to remove in the Selected Shareswindow. Click < to move the selected share to the other window. Repeat for any additionalshares you need to remove from device groups.

7. In the Catalyst Stores screen, select the store you want to remove in the Selected Catalyst Storeswindow. Click < to move the selected store to the other window. Repeat for any additionalstores you need to remove from device groups.

8. Click Finish. When you complete the wizard, any devices that you removed from the Selectedside of the screen will be deleted.

ReportsYou can generate reports for either appliance groups or virtual device groups:• Appliance group reports contain data about configured groups of remote HP StoreOnce

backup systems. See “Appliance reports” (page 188).• Virtual device group reports contain data about the virtual tape libraries, NAS shares, and

StoreOnce Catalyst stores that are configured on the remote appliances. See “Device reports”(page 194) .

NOTE: Until you create at least one virtual device group, the Device button will be disabled.Reports 187



Appliance reportsThere are three types of appliance reports you can run. See the following for more details:• “Appliance status reports” (page 188)• “Appliance throughput reports” (page 191)• “Appliance storage reports” (page 192)

Appliance status reportsNOTE: Devices in the Unknown state and service sets (nodes) in the Unknown state do notcontribute to the file system usage total, the bar graphs, or the deduplication ratio shown on thispage. Devices in Fault or Failed to start states do contribute to these reported values.

To view the status report for an appliance:1. On the Reports page, select Appliance.2. In the Groups menu, you will see all available appliance groups that have been registered

for reporting. Select All Appliances, or select an appliance group.




3. In the Appliance menu, select the specific appliance you want a report for. This field ispopulated with the appliances that are in the appliance group you chose in the previous step.You will see a report for the appliance you have selected.

DescriptionData type

Status of appliance health:Overall Health Status• Running: All services, including background services,

are running.• Online: System is idle and can be used any time.• Unknown: Appliance registration has not been

completed.• Unable to connect: A connection to the remote

appliance cannot be made. This could be due to theremote appliance rebooting or shut down, networkconnectivity issues or invalid credentials.

• Fault: Appliance is in a fault condition

Size on disk (used space) and free space in GB, and agraphic showing each as a percentage of the whole filesystem

File system usage

Deduplication ratio, size of user data stored, and sizeon disk

Deduplication device usage

Device status can be one of the following: VTL status• Running: The device has some jobs currently running,

which could be backup/restore or replication.• Online: The device has no jobs currently running,

and is available for backup/restore or replication.• Unknown: Remote appliance registration has not

been completed• Unable to connect: A connection to the remote

appliance cannot be made. This could be due to theremote appliance rebooting or shutting down,network connectivity issues, or invalid credentials.


Device replication status consists of both a status and ahealth level. See “Replication status” (page 191).

VTL replication

Reports 189




Device status can be one of the following:• Running: The device has some jobs currently running,






NAS status

Device replication status consists of both a status and ahealth level. See “Replication status” (page 191).

NAS replication

Device status can be one of the following:• Running: The device has some jobs currently running,





CAT status

Size of user data stored in GBUser data stored

Size on disk in GBSize on disk

Deduplication ratioDeduplication ratio

Status of appliance housekeeping activities:• Running: The housekeeping process is active.• Starting: The housekeeping process is starting up.• Stopping: The housekeeping process is shutting

down.Icons showing the status of appliance housekeepingactivities:• Green check: There are no warnings.• Blue I (information): Warning: The housekeeping

queue has not been empty within the last 24 hours,but has been empty within the last seven days.• Red X: Critical: The housekeeping queue has not

been empty within the last seven days.

Housekeeping




Replication statusFor each VTL and NAS device, the replication status consists of both a status label and an iconnext to the device replication status label.

Icon(s) associated with statusStatus labelStatus

OKSynchronized

OKSynchronizing

UnknownUnknown

Information neededNon-Replicating

OKPending synchronization

Warning

Critical

Appliance throughput reports

NOTE: When Appliance/Virtual Device is in UTC time zone the custom time period selectionwill use the browser time zone from where you are accessing Reporting Central.

To obtain an appliance throughput report:1. On the Reports page, select Appliance.2. In the Groups menu, you will see all available appliance groups that have been registered

for reporting. Select All Appliances, or select an appliance group.3. In the Appliance menu, select the specific appliance you want to run a report for.4. Select the devices you want to include in the report. The default (if you make no selection)

includes all devices. To select up to three specific devices, click Select Device, select the devicesyou want to include, and click OK .

The resulting graphs show data points for the selected time period, with time and date stamps onthe x axis, and throughput on the y axis. The upper graph shows throughput for the selected devices.The lower graph shows the throughput for replication sources or targets (VTL or NAS devices) orinbound and outbound copy jobs (StoreOnce Catalyst). To the right of each graph, the selected

Reports 191



devices and device names will be shown. The lower graph will also show labels for source, target,inbound, or outbound copy job information.Export Throughput Data allows you to export the displayed report to.csv or .png . If you select.csv , you will be prompted to open or save the file. If you select.png , the graphic will immediatelyopen in another browser window; you may need to temporarily allow pop-ups in your browser.

Appliance storage reportsYou can obtain four types of appliance storage reports:• “Appliance deduplication ratio report” (page 192)• “Appliance capacity usage report” (page 192)• “Appliance capacity forecasting report” (page 193)

Any graphs generated for a remote appliance will have the same time and time zone as the remoteappliance.

Appliance deduplication ratio reportTo obtain an appliance deduplication ratio report:1. On the Reports page, select Appliance.2. In the Groups menu, you will see all available appliance groups that have been registered

for reporting. Select All Appliances, or select an appliance group.3. In the Appliance menu, select the specific appliance you want to run a report for.4. Select the devices you want to include in the report. The default (if you make no selection)

includes all devices. To select specific devices, click Select Device, select the devices you wantto include, and click OK .

5. Select the Deduplication Ratio button.6. In the Period menu, select the amount of time you want to see the deduplication ratio for.

The resulting graph shows data points for the selected time period, with date and time stamps onthe x axis, and the deduplication ratio on the y axis.Export Deduplication Ratio Data allows you to export the displayed report to.csv or .png . If youselect .csv , you will be prompted to open or save the file. If you select.png , the graphic willimmediately open in another browser window; you may need to temporarily allow pop-ups in yourbrowser.

Appliance capacity usage reportTo obtain an appliance capacity usage report:1. On the Reports page, select Appliance.2. In the Groups menu, you will see all available appliance groups that have been registered

for reporting. Select All Appliances, or select an appliance group.3. In the Appliance menu, select the specific appliance you want to run a report for.




4. Select the devices you want to include in the report. The default (if you make no selection)includes all devices. To select specific devices, click Select Device, select the devices you wantto include, and click OK .

5. Select the Capacity Usage button.6. In the Period menu, select the amount of time you want to see capacity usage for.

The resulting graph shows data points for the selected time period, with date and time stamps onthe x axis, and capacity usage in GB or TB (user data stored and size on disk) on the y axis.Export Capacity Usage Data allows you to export the report that is showing to.csv or .png . If

you select .csv , you will be prompted to open or save the file. If you select.png , the graphicwill immediately open in another browser window; you may need to temporarily allow pop-upsin your browser.

Appliance capacity forecasting reportTo obtain an appliance capacity forecasting report:1. On the Reports page, select Appliance.2. In the Groups menu, you will see all available appliance groups that have been registered

for reporting. Select All Appliances, or select an appliance group.3. In the Appliance menu, select the specific appliance you want to run a report for.4. Select the Capacity Forecasting button. You will see an alert that tells you it will take a few

minutes to fetch the data for this report. Click OK .5. In the For Next menu, select the time frame you want the report to forecast for.

It can take a few minutes to generate the data. The resulting graph shows data points for theselected time period, with date and time stamps on the x axis, and forecasted storage and diskused on the y axis.You will see a dialog box pop up with a message if the system is unable to create a forecast. Ifthis occurs, try changing your report parameters and running the report again.

Reports 193



Device reportsThere are several types of device reports you can run:• “Device status reports” (page 194)• “Device throughput reports” (page 195)• “Device storage reports” (page 195)

NOTE: Until you create at least one virtual device group, the Device button will be disabled.

Device status reportsTo obtain a device status report:1. On the Reports page, select Device.2. In the Group menu, select the device group you want to run a report for.The resulting report details data for all devices in the selected group.

NOTE: Devices that are in an Unknown state do not contribute to the user data stored, size ondisk, or the deduplication ratio shown in this report. Devices in Fault or Failed to start states docontribute to these reported values.


The amount of user data stored in GB.User data stored

The size on disk in GB.Size on disk

The name of the device.Device name

The type of device: StoreOnce Catalyst, NAS share, or VTL.

Device type

Device status can be one of the following:Status• Running: The device has some jobs currently running,

which could be backup/restore or replication.• Online: The device has no jobs currently running, and

is available for backup/restore or replication.• Unknown: Host appliance registration has not been

completed• Unable to connect: A connection to the remote

appliance cannot be made. This could be due to theremote appliance rebooting or shutting down, networkconnectivity issues, or invalid credentials.


The IP address of the appliance hosting the device. Appliance address

N/A or any number up to 8, depending on how manycouplets are represented on the device.

Service set




Device throughput reports

NOTE: When Appliance/Virtual Device is in UTC time zone the custom time period selectionwill use the browser time zone from where you are accessing Reporting Central.

To obtain a device throughput report:1. On the Reports page, select Device.2. In the Group menu, select the device group you want to run a report for.

3. Click Select Device and select up to three devices. Click OK .4. In the Period menu, select the time frame you want throughput data for.

The resulting graphs show data points for the selected time period, with time and date stamps onthe x axis, and throughput on the y axis. The upper graph shows throughput for the selected devices.The lower graph shows the throughput for replication sources or targets (VTL or NAS devices) orinbound and outbound copy jobs (StoreOnce Catalyst). To the right of each graph, the selecteddevices and device names will be shown. The lower graph will also show labels for source, target,inbound, or outbound copy job information.

Export Throughput Data allows you to export the report that is showing to.csv or .png . If youselect .csv , you will be prompted to open or save the file. If you select.png , the graphic willimmediately open in another browser window; you may need to temporarily allow pop-ups in yourbrowser.

Device storage reportsYou can obtain two types of device storage reports:• “Device deduplication ratio” (page 195)• “Device capacity usage” (page 196)

Device deduplication ratioTo obtain a device deduplication ratio report:1. On the Reports page, select Device.2. In the Groups menu, select a device group.3. Select the Deduplication Ratio button.4. Click Select Device and select up to three devices. Click OK .5. In the Period menu, select the amount of time you want to see the deduplication ratio for.

Reports 195





13 Access and Device ConfigurationThis page provides System Information and access to the device configuration functions:• Device Configuration page (page 197)• “Firmware” (page 197)• User Management (page 199)• Email (page 205)• Support Ticket (page 207)

NOTE: In this context, Device refers to the HP StoreOnce Backup system, not the target deviceson the system.

Device Configuration pageSystem Information shows summary details for the HP StoreOnce Backup system that were set upat installation and cannot be modified from the GUI.

Table 55 System information

DescriptionField

StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700, 4900, and VSA:The serial number of the appliance. This is the number that

System ID

is required when licensing replication, StoreOnce Catalyst,or additional storage. It is referred to as the Cluster ID inthe StoreOnce CLI.

This text is used to label and identify the StoreOnce Backupsystem. It is set by the user with the StoreOnce CLIsystemset description command.

Description

FirmwareSelect the Firmware page to view the firmware versions for hardware components, and to updatefirmware versions if required.The page contains the following tabs:• Server : Contains hardware components for the server.• Storage: Contains hardware components for all storage elements.The tabs are empty when the page is first displayed and no information will be present until a scanhas been initiated.

Device Configuration page 197



Figure 15 Firmware page

Table 56 Firmware fields

DescriptionField

Allows selection of individual componentsCheckbox

The name of the componentDevice Type

The firmware version on the component Active Version

The firmware version that is qualified for use with HP StoreOnce Backup. If a componenthas been replaced, this may be earlier than the active version.

Qualified Version

The recommended action, which may be none, upgrade or downgradeRecommended Action

The status, which changes if an update is in progressStatus

To view and upgrade firmware1. Click Scan to perform a check on the currently installed firmware versions for all components

associated to the selected node. This will populate the firmware tabs. This may take severalminutes to run.

NOTE: The scan will fail if a firmware update is already in progress.

2. Look for components that have a Recommended Action of either Upgrade or Downgrade. Afteryou have run Scan or Scan All, components will automatically be selected for upgrade ordowngrade.

198 Access and Device Configuration



NOTE: When the firmware updates are initiated, the backup devices will be taken offline.Before performing this step, check that there are no outstanding backup jobs pending.

• If there are only one or two, click in the appropriate check box to select them and clickUpdate Selected.

• If there are many, click Update All. This will attempt to update all components that are inthe state where there is an update recommended; it will not try to update components

that do not need an update.The Status field will show which components are being updated and which updates havebeen completed.

3. When all updates are completed, a reboot may be required.

User ManagementTwo user accounts, Admin and Operator, and passwords are created at installation and are alwaysincluded on this page. Users may use this page to modify the passwords. They may also create,edit, and delete additional users. (See also User types and user roles (page 10).)

User accounts and ADIMPORTANT: Before granting access to external users or groups using the User Managementtool, you must first:1. Set the Authentication mode to AD on the NAS CIFS server tab. See “CIFS server tab”

(page 44) .2. Add the StoreOnce device to an AD domain. See “Adding the StoreOnce appliance to an

Active Directory (AD) domain” (page 51).3. Add any required users or groups to your active directory to grant access to the AD domain.

See “Assigning AD groups as administrators for the StoreOnce CIFS server” (page 58) and“Assigning AD users as administrators for the StoreOnce CIFS server” (page 54) and

4. Grant your external users or groups access permissions to the HP StoreOnce backup systemusing the User Management tool. See “Configuring AD authentication mode” (page 50).

NOTE: User accounts may also be managed using StoreOnce CLI commands. See the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide .

An operator screen will only show a Modify button, while an administrator user managementsummary screen will show additional buttons: Add Group, Add User , and Delete.

To add a user (administrator only)There are two types of users:• Local Users: A user created solely on the HP StoreOnce backup system.• External Users: A user who belongs to a domain to which the HP StoreOnce Backup system

has been joined. When you add an external user who is already a member of an existinggroup, you have the ability to assign this user to a different role than the group role. Nopassword is required for the external user because that is controlled via the Domain server.

User Management 199



To add a local user1. Click Add User .

2. Select a User Type of Local.3. Enter the User Name, and select a User Role of user or admin.4. Enter a password for the new user and confirm the password.5. Click OK .

To add an external user1. Click Add User .2. Select a User Type of External.

3. Enter User Name and User Role of user or admin.




NOTE: The user name must be in this format and the user must be part of an existing domain:<DOMAIN_NAME>\<USERNAME>, for example: AdminSys\ghearty

4. Click OK . If the user name is not in the correct format, an error message will appear, and theexternal user will not be created.

To add a group (administrator only)This option allows you to add a group that has already been set up on the AD domain to whichthe StoreOnce Backup system has been joined. When adding a group, you must choose a rolefor the group. All members of this group will have the same role.

NOTE: If, after creating the group, you configure a member of that group as an individual user(external user) with an admin role, that user will then be an Admin even if the group role is set toOperator. (Role permissions set through Add User take precedence over role permissions in AddGroup.)

1. Click Add Group.2. Enter Group Name.

NOTE: This group must already exist in your domain. For example:yourdomain.com\StoreOnceAdmins

3. Select a permissions role of user or admin, then click OK .If the group does not exist, exists already, or if there is missing information, an error messageis displayed.

To modify a userThe administrator user and users created with a user role of admin can modify any local userpassword or the role of an external user or external group. The operator user and users createdwith a user role of user may only modify their own password and cannot change the role of agroup or any other user.

To modify a local user1. Select the user to change a password for and click Modify. For a local user, you can modify

the user role or the user password, or both.

User Management 201



2. Change the role of the user, if required. Enter and confirm the new password.

3. Click OK . At the confirmation of success page, click OK .

To modify an external user or external group1. To modify an external user or group, select the external user or group to modify and click

Modify. You will have the option to change the permissions role. Only users with administratorpermissions can modify roles of users or groups.

2. Change the permissions role.3. Click OK . At the confirmation for the role change, click OK .

To delete a user or group (administrator only)IMPORTANT: You cannot delete the two default user accounts: Administrator and Operator.

1. Select the user or group and click Delete.




2. Click OK to confirm deletion of the selected user or group.

3. In the success confirmation box, click OK .

User InterfaceThe User Interface page allows you to change the following:• GUI Session Idle Timeout – The amount of time (in minutes) the GUI can remain idle until it

times out and requires another login.• Audit Log Retention Period – The number of days the system will store the audit logs. After this

period, the logs are permanently deleted.To change these settings:1. Click Modify to open the User Interface Settings window.2. Select the number of idle minutes that triggers the timeout. The options are 1, 2, 5, 10, 15

(default), 30, and 60.3. Enter the number of days (from 15 to 365, default is 30) to retain the audit logs.4. Click OK . The GUI session idle time will take effect the next time you log in. Your current

session will still have the previous idle time.

SSL certificatesThe StoreOnce management GUI is accessed via the HTTPS protocol which requires the exchangeof an SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) certificate to authenticate the connection between web browserand the StoreOnce appliance. The StoreOnce appliance by default will return a generic SSLcertificate which is created when the system is manufactured. This generic certificate does notuniquely identify the appliance, and therefore is not considered to be secure by the web browser.The user has the option to change the SSL certificate to provide a better level of authentication.

The following options are available:• Provide some unique information (comprised of the appliance name and administrator contact

details) to generate a certificate on the appliance which will return this data to the web browserin the certificate. This is referred to a a "Self-signed Certificate".

• Export the Self-signed Certificate to a file called a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). This CScan then be externally signed by a Certificate Authority, and returned in the form of a certificatefile which can be uploaded to the StoreOnce appliance. This provides an additional level ofauthentication as the web browser may then be provided with a root certificate of the certificateauthority against which it can verify appliance certificates.The Certificate Authority may be an external body, or it may be a server running tools requiredto generate a certificate internally to an organization.

User Interface 203



In addition, when using the Reporting Central functionality of the StoreOnce appliance toremotely monitor other StoreOnce appliances, if using self-signed certificates you must downloadthe certificate from the appliance that you want to manage and import that certificate ontothe appliance that will be used to perform the Reporting Central function. See “ReportingCentral” (page 176).

The SSL certificate page, available on software versions 3.12.0 and higher, allows a user withadministrative role privileges to:

• Generate a self-signed certificate• Generate a certificate signing request (CSR) to send to a Certificate Authority (CA)• Import a certificate generated by the CA• Export the installed certificate

Generating a self-signed certificateTo generate a self-signed certificate:1. On the SSL Certificate page, click Modify.2. Enter the requested information.

DescriptionField

Name of the system, in the form of either IP Address, orFQDN

Name

State the appliance is located inState

City the appliance is located inCity

Organization of the certificate requestorOrganization

Organization unit of the certificate requestorOrganization unit

Email address of the certificate requestorEmail address

Country the appliance is located inCountryMaximum number of days the certificate will remainvalid. Values are 0 to 36363

Number of days valid

3. Click Generate. A message is displayed warning the user that the existing certificate will beoverwritten.

4. Click OK . A success message is displayed. The certificate is now stored locally on the system.The new SSL certificate will not take effect until the StoreOnce appliance is rebooted.

Generating a Certificate Signing Request

To generate a CSR:1. On the SSL Certificate page, click Generate CSR.2. In the Generate CSR dialog box, click Download.3. In the Save HTML document dialog box, navigate to an easily identifiable location and click

SAVE. If your browser does not give you the option to select the location, the file will downloadto your local systemDownloads folder.

A certificate authority (CA) can use this CSR file to generate a new SSL certificate which can thenbe uploaded to the StoreOnce appliance. Follow the instructions provided by your CA to generatethe new SSL cerficate.




Uploading a certificateUploading an SSL certificate that has been generated by a CA will install the certificate in the webserver of the StoreOnce appliance. This certificate will be used to identify the appliance to clientsthat connect to the appliance.To upload a certificate:1. Open a WinSCP session (or your preferred FTP client).2. Enter the IP address and the user name and password for your StoreOnce appliance.

3. Copy the certificate file (.p7b file) from your local system to the/repository folder on HPStoreOnce appliance.

NOTE: Only users with Administrator privileges can copy files to/repository . A userwith Operator permissions does not have permission to copy to this directory.

4. On the SSL Certificate page of the GUI, click Upload Certificate.5. Select the preferred certificate from the list. This list is populated using all available certificate

files in the StoreOnce appliance /repository folder.

:The uploaded certificate must be generated from the currently installed self-signed certificate.If you generate a new self-signed certificate with different values in the fields, then any signedcertificates generated from the previous self-signed certificate will fail to upload, because thesystem checks that the signed certificate is actually a signed version of the self-signed onecurrently in place.

6. Enter an Alias Name for your certificate.7. Click Upload.8. Click OK to replace the existing certificate with the one you have just chosen.

The newly uploaded certificate overwrites any previous certificate whether self-signed or signedby a CA.

9. Reboot at the prompt.Exporting the installed certificateTo export a previously installed certificate:Procedure 31. On the SSL certificate page, click Export Certificate.2. In the Export Certificate dialog box, click Generate. A copy of the .crt file is downloaded

to the appliance /repository folder.

EmailSelect Email from the Device Configuration menu item to display the current email setup.

The Email Setup page displays the current configuration for sending out event notifications viaemail. This includes information needed to route the email (SMTP server), as well as the associationof events with destination email addresses. A single event can generate a notification to multipleemail addresses. Also, different sets of events can generate notifications to different email addresses.

Email 205



To configure email settingsClick Configure and enter the required details.

Table 57 Email setup parameters

DescriptionName

Whether email notification is currently enabled or disabled. When email notification isdisabled, the association between events and destination addresses remains valid, butthe events do not produce email.

Email Notification

The mail server used to send out the email.SMTP Server

The address from which the notification email originates.Mail From

An optional address if you want the recipient to reply to an email address different fromthe address where the email originated.

Reply To

Test email1. Click Test to open the Test Email dialog.2. Enter the destination email address and a subject, then click OK .

An email message is sent only if email notification is enabled on the Email Setup page.

Events (Email)Select Events from the Navigator.

The Events topic page lists the event types that may be notified by email and the addresses towhich the email notifications are sent. There are three types of events that generate emailnotifications, listed under the Severity column once they have been setup in Manage EmailNotifications. If the same event generates email notifications to multiple addresses, a separate rowis used to represent each event/email-address pairing. The fields are:




Table 58 Events notified by email parameters

DescriptionName

Severity of the event (INFO/WARN/ALERT).Severity

The email destination address.Email Destination

To manage email notifications1. Click Manage Email Notifications to update the event/email-address association list.

2. On the Manage Email Notifications dialog, do one of the following:• Choose an existing email address from the drop-down menu and click Select to display

it in the Update events for addresses field• Enter a new address directly into the Update events for addresses field

3. Select the event group(s) to be associated with the addresses (Alert, Warn, and/or Info), andclick OK to update the list. The updated list is displayed almost immediately in the EventsNotified by Email topic page.

Support TicketThe Support Ticket page provides information about the Support Ticket configuration. HP Supportwill ask customers to upload support tickets to an FTP site to aid diagnosis of issues a customermay be experiencing. Information about support tickets that have been generated is found underthe Data Collection topic. See Data collection (page 208).The following support tickets are available:• Full support ticket – provides a complete set of data for diagnosing problems• Basic support ticket – provides a subset of the full support ticket information and is generated

more quickly. Providing HP support with a basic support ticket while the full support ticket isbeing generated can greatly speed up the overall support process.

To modify the Support Ticket configurationClick Modify, make the required changes, and click OK .

Support Ticket 207



Table 59 Support ticket parameters

DescriptionName

Shows whether data collection for a system crash is enabled or not. Automatic data collectionenabled

The retention policy. The number denotes the number of previously collected tar files tobe retained in each node.

Number of data sets to beretained

After each data collection, a zip file containing specified StoreOnce and system commandoutputs representing the system configuration may be sent. This can be enabled ordisabled.

Send system configurationby email enabled

SMTP server to send the configuration information.SMTP server

Email ID from which the configuration email will be sent.From

Email ID to which configuration will be sent.To

IMPORTANT: StoreOnce 4700 and 4900: When contacting HP Support it is important to providethe correct serial number for the product. This is the serial number located on a label or warrantytag attached to the product and NOT the serial number that appears on the GUI. See (page 248)for more details.

Data collectionThis page provides a log of generated data collections called a support ticket. Collect a full orbasic support ticket, download it, and delete it from this page. Note that full support tickets canbe quite large in size.

NOTE: The Collect, Download, Delete, and Delete All buttons are only available in the GUI toadministrators. However, operators can still Collect and Delete support tickets using the CLI.






The dialog contains one field: filename.

Download data collectionUse the Download button to download the selected data collection. Select whether you want todownload the basic or the full support ticket.HP recommends downloading the support tickets as soon as possible before doing anything elseto the system such as rebooting or changing a node to maintenance. If the active managementservice moves to another node before the tickets download, the tickets cannot be retrieved fromthe StoreOnce GUI.

Delete data collectionUse the Delete button to delete the selected data collections, or Delete All to remove all datacollections. This operation removes the tar files on each node from the system.

NOTE: This operation may take some time.

The equivalent CLI command issupport del ticket and is accessible to both administratorsand operators.

MaintenanceThe Maintenance page provides the ability to shut down or reboot the system hardware.• Shutdown – Shuts down the StoreOnce appliance. Storage enclosures, switches, and other

hardware components are not affected and must be powered off manually after shutting downthe StoreOnce server node. This function is the same as using the CLIsystem shutdowncommand.

• Reboot – Reboots the StoreOnce appliance. Storage enclosures, switches, and other hardwarecomponents are not affected. This function is the same as using the CLIsystem rebootcommand.




14 Network configurationThe following topics are available:• Network configuration basics (page 211)• Network configuration guidelines (page 215)• Network configuration example (administrator only) (page 216)

Network configuration basicsHP StoreOnce Backup systems support both IPv4 and IPv6 address protocols. IPv4 is available forall target devices and for appliance management; IPv6 is only supported for StoreOnce Catalyststores and for appliance management.

All systems also support DHCP (IPv4 and IPv6).

Network configuration componentsThe network is defined in a single network configuration with three main components: DNS serversettings, Port Set settings and Subnet settings. The key points to understand when creating ormodifying the configuration are described below.DNS serversUp to three DNS servers may be configured for the StoreOnce Backup system. These may haveIPv4 and/or IPv6 addresses and apply across all Port Sets and Subnets defined within theconfiguration.In order to use FQDNs “Fully Qualified Domain Names” rather than an IP address to access theStoreOnce system, the DNS server addresses that you provide should be able to resolve addressesfor all configured subnets. If you are using IPv4 and IPv6 addressing, then DNS servers configuredneed to be able to resolve both IPV4 and IPV6 FQDNs. Up to three DNS servers (one primary,and two backup servers if the primary is unavailable) may be configured for the StoreOnce Backupsystem, which have IPv4 and/or IPv6 addresses.NOTE: DNS Server and Gateway addresses will not be acquired in the following Subnetconfiguration:• VLAN Tag Enabled Subnet configured• Addressing mode set to DHCP with the expectation of acquiring IPv6 address details• DHCPv6 Server is running on a Windows Server operating systemIn this configuration it is possible to manually provide the DNS Server and Gateway addressesthat should have been acquired via DHCPv6.

Port sets• A port set defines the physical 1 Gbit and 10 Gbit Ethernet ports that you intend to connect

to your network.• A port set also defines the network bonding mode (1, 4 or 6) for the ports and whether they

are VLAN enabled. (VLAN tagging enables more subnets to be accessed without extra NIChost bus adapters.)

• At least one Port Set must be configured to support connection to the StoreOnce ManagementCLI and GUI. Further Port Sets may be defined, according to the number and type of physicalports still available and how they are bonded.

• Each Port Set will have at least one Subnet.

Network configuration basics 211



• If the Port Set is not VLAN enabled, it may be configured with one Data Subnet that uses theIPv4 protocol and one Data Subnet that uses the IPv6 protocol. (This configuration is sometimesreferred to as a dual stack configuration.)

• If the Port Set is VLAN enabled, multiple virtual subnets (IPv4 and IPv6), up to a maximum of128 for the whole system, may be attached to a single Port Set. If VLAN enabled, a Port Setcannot use bonding mode 6.

SubnetsSubnets define the network paths used by clients to access the StoreOnce Backup system for Backupand Management, and the network paths that are used for StoreOnce Catalyst Copy andReplication.• Subnets are attached to each Port Set that is configured. Both IPv4 and IPv6 address protocols

are supported. Single-node systems also support DHCP. See Network configuration subnetfields (page 222) for more details.

• IPv6 is supported for backup to all StoreOnce Catalyst stores, replication and Catalyst Copy,and for appliance management. It cannot be used with VTL or NAS shares (CIFS or NFS).

• If multiple Subnets are defined, one (and only one) Subnet for each protocol, IPv4 and IPv6,must always be designated as the default Subnet for routing traffic to IP addresses that arenot within the configured Subnets.

• StoreOnce software version 3.11.0 and later provides support for Data In Flight Encryptionusing the IPsec protocol. This can only be configured using the StoreOnce CLI. Refer to theHP StoreOnce CLI Reference Guide .

The following diagram provides a simplified overview of the hierarchy within a network configurationfor a StoreOnce Backup system.

Figure 16 Network configuration hierarchy

212 Network configuration



Port numbering for hardware productsThe StoreOnce CLI and the StoreOnce GUI label port numbers differently. The following tableequates the port numbering as it is referred to in the StoreOnce CLI with the port naming on theStoreOnce GUI.Table 61 Port numbering

StoreOnce Models1 Gbit or 10 GbitethernetStoreOnce GUI

StoreOnce CLIand GUI

All models1 GbitPort 1eth0




4900, 2900, 4700 and 4500, but not 270010 GbitPort 1eth4

4900, 2900, 4700 and 4500, but not 270010 GbitPort 2eth5

4900 only, not 2700, 2900, 4500 or 470010 GbitPort 3eth6

4900 only, not 2700, 2900, 4500 or 470010 GbitPort 4eth7

NOTE: On the StoreOnce GUI you can display a picture of where the ports are by editing aportset and clicking the Show Port Picture link.

Network bonding modesEach set of network ports on the appliance can be configured either on separate Subnets or in abond with each other (1 Gbit and 10 Gbit ethernet ports cannot be bonded together).Three bonding modes are supported:• Mode 1 (Active/Backup)

This is the most simple bonding mode; it allows network traffic via one active port only andrequires no specific extra switch configuration. It is recommended for simple networkconnections, if the active network link fails then traffic moves to the backup port.

• Mode 4 (IEEE 802.3ad Dynamic Link Aggregation)This bonding mode is also known as LACP and requires a special external switch configuration.It provides a link aggregation solution, increasing the bond physical bandwidth, but onlyworks if all the ports in the bond are connected to one switch or switches joined by aninterswitch link. It is recommended when:

◦ The customer wants to increase throughput to the StoreOnce appliance.

◦ Trunks between switches on the customer network already use LACP mode.The LACP protocol only works when it is configured on both the network switch and StoreOncend of the connection. Please refer to your switch documentation for information on LACPconfiguration.

• Mode 6 (Active Load Balancing)This mode provides a load balance solution. It does not require specific external switchconfiguration but does require the switch to allow ARP negotiation. It can be used in a 2–switchconfiguration.This configuration is generally recommended for backup data performance and also forresiliency of both data and management network connectivity. However, in some environments

Network configuration basics 213



ARP packet negotiation may be disabled within the network infrastructure, so this mode maynot be appropriate.

NOTE: When using bonded ports the full performance of bonded links are only realized if multiplehost servers are providing data, otherwise data will still use only one network path from the singleserver.

VLAN Subnets with HP StoreOnce BackupThere is a fixed number of available physical NIC ports on the HP StoreOnce Backup system,defined by the number of 1 Gbit ports plus 10 Gbit ethernet ports, therefore there is a limit on thenumber of physical Subnets to which the HP StoreOnce Backup system can be directly connected.If your network requires more Subnets than this—for example, twenty—the network administratorcan define 20 VLANs, each with its own Subnet and, typically, use the 10 Gbit ethernet bondedlink to the HP StoreOnce Backup system as a trunk.To do this, the network administrator sets up the switches with the necessary VLANs and identifies20 tags. (The tag values can be any integer between range 2-4094.) The ports on the networkswitch to which the StoreOnce Backup system connects must be trunked and tagged. Then usingthe StoreOnce CLI, the HP StoreOnce administrator modifies the network configuration by firstdefining the Port Set for the physical 10 Gbit ethernet link and making it VLAN enabled, and thenconfiguring each of the twenty VLAN Subnets to use that Port Set.

VLAN guidelinesThe following guidelines apply:• The user can configure up to a total of 128 different VLAN Subnets on each StoreOnce Backup

system; the VLAN Subnets may be consecutive or non-consecutive.• The user can configure all VLAN Subnets on one Port Set or divide the VLAN Subnets over

multiple Port Sets.• It is not permitted to configure VLAN Subnets on a Port Set that uses Mode 6 network bonding.•

Each VLAN tag interface is configured using the VLAN ID index, which is the same as theswitch VLAN ID number and must be an integer from 2 to 4094.• Each VLAN tag interface can configured for use with one IPv4 and one IPv6 subnet.

For example, if a VLAN tag ID was configured for use with ports eth 0 and eth1 on IPv4, itcan also be configured for use on IPv6 with that Port Set but it cannot be used with any otherPort Set.

• The user can add/delete/modify the VLAN network configuration without interruptingnon-affected network configuration on the appliance.

• VLAN tagging does not increase bandwidth because the bandwidth is bound by the physicalspeed of the Port Set. The number of open streams is bound by the specification for the

StoreOnce appliance.• StoreOnce monitoring is on the physical Port Set, not on each VLAN Subnet.• VLAN tagging is not a multi-tenancy solution. Once configured, all StoreOnce services can

bind / listen to all VLAN Subnets. For example the NAS shares are available on all configuredSubnets, and permissions are required to regulate access to shares.




Example network environmentIn the following example the following Port Sets are configured on the StoreOnce Backup system:• eth0 is the Quick Install connection that was created by connecting LAN port 1 at installation.

It uses DHCP and is not VLAN enabled. If required, it can be reconfigured with static IPaddresses.

• eth2 and eth3 are used for the StoreOnce Catalyst Copy and Replication Subnet and providethe default gateway to the WAN. This Port Set is also not VLAN enabled and is configuredto support one IPv4 Subnet. It uses the 1 Gbit ethernet ports, Port 3 and Port 4. If required,one IPv6 subnet could be configured on this Port Set after installation.

• eth4 and eth5 are used for Backup Subnets. This Port Set is VLAN enabled and currentlysupports two VLAN Subnets — one IPv4 subnet and one IPv6 subnet. Further IPv4 and IPv6

VLAN Subnets may be configured on this Port Set, as required, up to a maximum of 128. ThePort Set uses the 10 Gbit ethernet ports, Port 1 and Port 2.

• eth1, (the 1 Gbit ethernet port, Port 2), is available to support a further Port Set. (Some HPStoreOnce Backups systems provide four 10 Gbit ethernet ports, and eth6 and eth7, (the 10Gbit ethernet ports, Port 3 and Port 4) may also be configured to support further Port Sets.However, these ports are not available on all models.)

NOTE: The availability and number of 10 Gbit ethernet ports depends upon the model ofStoreOnce Backup system.

Figure 17 Network example

Network configuration guidelinesFor installations where you are not installing on a DHCP network it is necessary to use the StoreOnce

CLI wizard command sequence,net set wizard , to set up the basic network configurationNetwork configuration guidelines 215



that gives you access to the StoreOnce GUI. The StoreOnce GUI or StoreOnce CLI may then beused to refine the network configuration.For more complex configurations, a major benefit of using the StoreOnce GUI is that theconfiguration can be saved at any point in the network configuration process. See the appropriateHP StoreOnce Installation and Configuration guide for your product for examples of using theStoreOnce CLI to configure the network.See the HP StoreOnce CLI Reference guide for examplesof using the StoreOnce CLI to refine the network configuration.

NOTE: If you are installing on a DHCP network and you connect to LAN port 1, you do not needto use the StoreOnce CLI wizard command sequence. A basic network configuration is createdautomatically for you, which gives you immediate access to the StoreOnce GUI. You can then usethe StoreOnce GUI pages to refine the network configuration.

When working with network configurations the following guidelines apply:• There may be up to 16 configurations on any StoreOnce Backup system, but only one can

be active.• There are two fixed configurations reserved for the system that cannot be modified:

Factory_Default_Configuration and current .• Configuration names are alpha numeric.• There are three stages to applying a new network configuration: create the configuration,

validate the configuration and activate the configuration.• Once a configuration is activated, it becomes thecurrent configuration. There can be only

one current configuration.• When activating a network configuration that contains many VLAN subnets, the process can

take many minutes. During this time the GUI will continue to show the previous configurationuntil the new one is successfully applied. During activation, you can run the CLI commandnetwork activate status to monitor the activation progress.

• Once you have finished creating a network configuration and whenever you modify a networkconfiguration, be sure to use the StoreOnce CLI to create a system configuration save andrestore file, using the StoreOnce CLI command,config save devices .

• Refer to the HP StoreOnce CLI Reference Guide for the full range of network and config saveand restore commands.

Configuring the network on the StoreOnce GUI (administrator only) All actions described here can also be carried out using the StoreOnce CLI. Configuring Data inFlight encryption using IPSec is only possible via the StoreOnce CLI. For more information refer tothe HP StoreOnce Backup Installation and Configuration guide for your product or the HP StoreOnceCLI Reference guide.

At installationHP StoreOnce 4900 , 2900, 4700, 4500 and 2700 Backup systems support DHCP and thesimplest configuration at installation is to connect to LAN port 1 and log on to the StoreOnce GUIusing the name of the StoreOnce Backup system. If this address option is not supported on yourDHCP network or you have not connected to LAN port 1, you will need to connect to the localconsole and query the DHCP-assigned address using the StoreOnce CLI command,net showstatus all .On HP StoreOnce 4900 , 2900, 4700, 4500 and 2700 Backup systems that are not in a DHCPenvironment, the recommended option is to use the StoreOnce CLI command,net set wizard ,for basic configuration, and the StoreOnce GUI to set up more complex configuration settings.




After installationUse the StoreOnce GUI, as described here, or the StoreOnce CLI, as described in the HP StoreOnce CLI Reference Guide , to make changes to a configuration. A major benefit of using the StoreOnceGUI, particularly if configuring multiple VLANs, is that you can save the configuration as you woron it.The Network Configuration tools are under HP StoreOnce — Device Configuration. Expand NetworkConfiguration in the navigation pane.

Network Configuration ListUnder HP StoreOnce — Device Configuration, expand Network Configuration by clicking + toexpand Network Configuration in the Navigator and access the network configuration list.The network configuration list page shows the name and description of the network configurationsthat are created. Only one configuration is currently active, this is named current. There will alsobe a Factory_Default_Configuration and may be up to 14 Custom configurations created by theuser.• There is a minimum of two entries: Factory_Default_Configuration and current

current is the active network configuration.◦

◦ Factory_Default_Configuration is the default network configuration at delivery and afterQuick Restore, QR. For single-node systems, the network is configured to use DHCP andconnect via LAN port 1.

• There may be up to 14 Custom configurations created by the user.

Some systems may have a net_wizard entry. This configuration is created by running theStoreOnce CLI command,net_set_wizard

◦

◦ For all other configurations: the Name field is the name provided by the user when creatingor copying a configuration. (Names must always be unique.) The Description field is thedescription provided by the user when creating or copying a configuration.

Current Network ConfigurationThis page shows thecurrent network configuration. This is the active configuration and cannotbe edited. However, the current configuration is a copy of the last activated configuration; theoriginal remains (unlinked) and can be modified.The current configuration page has two tabs.• Configuration shows the settings that have been applied to the configuration by the user.• Status shows the actual settings that are reported based upon that configuration.For example: if DHCP is enabled for a subnet, the Configuration tab will simply show that the IPaddress, Netmask, Gateway and Domain name are "DHCP Assigned", whereas the Status tab

will show the actually assigned addresses.Network Configuration List 217





Select the Custom item in the Network Configuration section of the navigation pane to display alist of all custom network configurations that have been created by the user, showing the Nameand Description. Each configuration may be selected using the checkbox on the left-hand side,some actions can be performed on multiple configurations at the same time. The following actionsare available from this page.• Activate: Click this button to activate the selected custom network configuration. If the action

is successful, the selected custom network configuration will become the current configuration

NOTE: It is not possible to activate a new configuration if storage addition is in progress.• Delete: Click this button to delete the selected custom network configuration(s).• Edit: Click this button to edit the selected custom network configuration.• New: Click this button to create a new custom network configuration.

NOTE: If a configuration is Protected, you cannot delete it until you use the Edit function to disablethe Protected checkbox.

To add a custom configurationThe following steps provide an overview of the process.1. Create the configuration (or copy an existing one) and specify the DNS servers, as required.2. Create the first Port Set and save the configuration. At this point you may decide to set up

Subnets for the Port Set, or to continue to set up all required Port Sets before defining Subnetsfor each Port Set.

3. Create the required Subnets for each Port Set and save the configuration.4. Validate the configuration.5. If validation fails, correct errors. If it passes, either activate immediately at the prompt. Or

save the configuration and activate subsequently from the Custom Network Configuration List.

TIP: If configuring multiple VLANs, or reconfiguring a complex network, it may take severalminutes for the configuration to activate. During this time the Current Configuration page will showthe previous configuration and will be updated once activation is complete for the new configuration.

Step 1: Create new configuration and define DNS servers1. On the Custom page, click on the New button.2. Enter a Config Name. The name must be unique; spaces and special characters are not

permitted but underscore is allowed. The Config Description is optional. However, it is goodpractice to put the configuration name into the description field because the description iscopied to the current configuration, when the configuration is activated.

NOTE: If there is an existing configuration that you wish to use as a template, select it fromthe Copy Existing drop-down list.

To add a custom configuration 219



3. Click on the Create button. At this point a new configuration will be opened for you to edit.

4. As appropriate, select IPv4 or IPv6 for any DNS servers and enter the required addresses inthe appropriate format. Click Save.

Table 62 Network Configuration IP protocol and DNS fields


This reflects the name of the configuration selected in thelist.

Name of the configuration

This checkbox is always greyed out for the Current and

Factory Default configurations because they cannot be

Protected

edited. Custom configurations can be edited and thecheckbox is active to indicate their protection status.

DNS server details: These settings apply across all other settings.

The radio button selected defines the Internet Protocol forthe DNS servers.

Protocol: IPv4 or IPv6

Up to three IPv4 and/or IPv6 DNS addresses may bedefined. The format of the address details is as appropriate

DNS Address 1/2/3

for the protocol selected. For more information, see “DNSservers” (page 211).




Step 2: Create Port Sets1. On the Port Set bar click Add to create the first Port Set.

2. Enter a name for the Port Set and select the ports to use. Available ports depend upon the

model of StoreOnce Backup system and whether ports have already been assigned. Onlythose ports that are available are active for selection; others are greyed out if they are alreadyin use.Click on the Show Port Picture link to display a picture of the rear of the model with portslabeled.

Table 63 Network Configuration Port Set fields


The name of the Port SetPort Set Name

The ports that have been defined for use by the Port Setand their speed..

Ports

Any bond mode that has been defined. Bond modesare only appropriate if there is more than one port inthe Port Set.

Bond mode

This defines whether the Port Set is VLAN enabled ornot.

VLAN Tagging Enable

3. If multiple ports are selected, the Bond Mode selection will be active.If required, check the VLAN Tagging Enable box and click OK .

NOTE: VLAN tagging is not supported with Bonding Mode 6.

4. At this point you may choose to define the Subnets for the Port Set or to create additional PortSets by clicking on Add in the Port set section. For the purposes of this example, we shallcontinue to Subnet configuration.

TIP: It is good practice to Save the network configuration at regular intervals.

To add a custom configuration 221



Step 3: Create Subnets1. Select the Port Set and click Add in the Subnet section.

Table 64 Network Configuration New Subnet fields

DescriptionName

The name of the SubnetName

Select IPv4 or IPv6.Protocol

The IP address for the subnet, in the appropriate format

for the protocol selected.

IP address

When checked, this box indicates that this is the Subnetthat contains the default gateway. A default subnetshould be provided for both IPv4 and IPv6 networks.

Default Subnet

The network maskNetwork Mask (IPv4 only)

The network prefix in CIDR formatPrefix (IPv6 only)

The domain nameDomain Name

The VLAN tag ID (2 to 4096) VLAN tag

2. Provide the Subnet details listed in Network configuration subnet fields (page 222), and clickOK .• For IPv4 Subnets select the IPv4 button and provide the relevant details.• For IPv6 Subnets select the IPv6 button and provide the relevant details.• DHCP Subnets may support both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols.








To edit a custom configurationYou cannot edit thecurrent or the Factory_Default_Configuration . However, you canedit any configuration in the Custom configuration list. if the StoreOnce CLI wizard was used toconfigure the network at installation, there will be at least one custom configuration in the list,net_wizard.

NOTE: Before activating an edited custom configuration, you may like to create a copy of thecurrent configuration and save it to a different name. Once current is overwritten it cannot berestored.1. Select the configuration that you wish to edit and click Edit.2. Make changes to the editable fields, as appropriate, and click Save. Some examples are

described below.

To add a VLAN–enabled Port Set and VLAN Subnet1. Select the configuration in the Custom Network Configuration list and click Edit.2. In the Port set section, click Add.3. Enter Port Set details, in exactly the same way as when creating a new configuration.

•

Select the required 1 Gbit or 10 Gbit ports. Available ports are active for selection; portsalready assigned are greyed out.• If multiple ports have been selected, select a Bond Mode, as appropriate. This should be

Mode 1 or Mode 4 for VLAN.4. Be sure to check the VLAN Tagging Enable box and click OK .5. In the Subnet section, click Add.6. Enter Subnet details, in exactly the same way as when creating a new configuration, and be

sure to add the VLAN tag ID. Click OK .7. Save and validate the changes. If required, you can also activate the configuration at this

point.

To write protect or un-protect a configurationSelect the configuration in the Custom Network Configuration list and click Edit.Click in the Protected checkbox to change its status and click Save.Repeat this process to switch the status back to Un-protected.

To delete a custom configurationYou may only delete Custom configurations. You cannot delete thecurrent or theFactory_Default_Configuration .1. Select the required configuration in the Custom configuration list and click Delete.

2. At the prompt click OK to confirm the deletion.

TIP: If you delete the custom configuration that has been activated to become thecurrentconfiguration, you are effectively deleting your backup of thecurrent configuration. This meansthat if you need to modify thecurrent configuration, you will have no backup of it unless youcopy it first.

To edit a custom configuration 225



15 EventsSelect Events from the Navigator to display each Alert, Warning, Information, and Audit messagegenerated by the Management Server.The following levels of events are represented:• Alerts: Disruptive events that can result in loss of access to data.• Warnings: Potentially disruptive conditions in which access is not lost, but if the situation is

not addressed, it can escalate to an Alert condition; for example, reaching a very high serverCPU utilization or approaching a quota limit.

• Information: Events occurring under normal or non-threatening conditions that change thesystem.

• Audit: Actions taken by users on the system such as logging in, rebooting, adding storage,creating libraries, editing NAS shares, modifying the network, etc. This includes actions takenthrough the GUI and through CLI.

TIP: See also the Hardware Problem Report (page 150) (only available with HP StoreOnce 2620,4210, 4220, 4420, and 4430 Backup systems).

Table 66 Events log columns

DescriptionName

The icon in the Level column displays the severity of the event. (Information and audit events

use the same icon.) This column is sortable by severity type.

Level

The time that the event originated on the Management Server. Click on the column headingto sort in ascending or descending order.

Time

The text of the event, including details and suggested actions. This column is not sortable.Event

To define how long events are kept before being deleted from the log, see To delete events fromthe log (page 228) .Use the log navigation buttons at the bottom of the log to move through the pages or move to aspecific page.The Event Details at the bottom of the page provide more specific information about the selectedevent.

226 Events



Table 67 Event Details

DescriptionName

The level of event severity (Alert, Warning, or Info).Severity

The unique ID given to that event.Event ID

This is the same information as provided in the Event column in the Events log.Message

What initially triggered the event. This is only shown when the root cause is available.Root Cause

Provides a direct action to take for problem resolution. This is only shown when a recommendedaction is available.

Recommended Action

Filtering and searching the eventsUse the filter at the bottom of the events log to filter the events displayed. All Events is the default,or select a specific type.Select Custom Search from the filter to open the Custom Search for Events window. Use anycombination of the following fields:• Search Text: enter a partial string, for exampleIP address . You cannot use “*” as a

wildcard; the search looks for that specific character. This field is not case sensitive• Level: select the level of event, or leave the default of All Events.• Start Date: use the calendar icon to select a date. The time defaults to 00:00:00 (the beginning

of the day) and is editable.• End Date: use the calendar icon to select a date. The time defaults to 00:00:00 (the beginning

of the day) and is editable.

NOTE: The Custom Search option is for English language GUIs only; the option is disabled inlocalized GUIs.

TIP:• To search today’s events, select Today as the start date and do not include an end date.• To search for one specific day, select that day as the Start Date and select the next day as

the End Date; the times default to 00:00:00 and therefore only includes the Start Date.• When editing the time, overwrite each unit of time individually leaving the colons between

them intact; do not overwrite the entire time stamp.

227



Exporting the Events logClick Export at the top of the Events log to save a CSV file locally. The entire Events log is exportedregardless of what is currently displayed on the Events page.

To delete events from the logNOTE: It is sometimes necessary to reduce the size of the Events log before carrying out a softwareupdate. Always refer to the update release notes to check the current recommendation.

1. Click Delete at the top of the Events log.2. Enter the number of days.

3. Click OK .

228 Events





security reasons. Only custom accounts are provided, the default Admin and Operator accountsettings are not included in the file.

• Network: StoreOnce CLI command information is provided to allow the user to reapply networksettings for 1GbE and 10GbE network configurations.

• Time and Date: This includes NTP server and timezone settings for the appliance.• SNMP Trap: SNMP trap users, trapsink and version configuration settings are provided in the

form of StoreOnce CLI commands that must be issued to re-configure the SNMP trapconfiguration.

• Email Alerts: Configuration settings for email servers, and registered email addresses withtheir event levels are provided so that these settings can be re-entered via the GUI.

• Licenses: License keys for capacity expansion, replication and StoreOnce Catalyst are providedin the text file along with the command syntax for re-entering the license keys.

IMPORTANT: To restore any of the above settings, do so BEFORE performing the automatedportion of the restore, otherwise some settings will not be restorable using the automated process.

Under each section, a list of CLI commands (if available) or instructions to restore the DeviceManagement settings are listed.

Example configuration fileThe following example is for an HP 4000 or 2000 Series Backup system.HP StoreOnce Recovery Instructions

Product: HP StoreOnce 4210 FC BackupCluster ID: HPMXQ31302WBDate Recorded: 2014-Oct-06 06:00:38 UTC

#User Account Management1. accounts add bob type local level user newpassword <password> <password>2. accounts add kate type local level admin newpassword <password> <password>

#Network configurationnet create config myconfig description "IPv4 network configuration" writeprotect no dns 192.168.10.10,192.168.10.12subnet ALL default yes ipaddr 192.168.10.50 netmask 255.255.255.0 gateway 192.168.10.1

#TimeZone Settingstime set timezone UTC#SNMP TRAP configuration1. snmp add trapsink mysimserver.mycompany.local version 1 events alert

#SNMP Enable configurationsnmp enable version 1 engine-id 2130706433 allownonv3request no

#SNMP Set configurationsnmp set contact Jadminsnmp set location paradisesnmp set ro-community public

#EMAIL configurationTo configure the Email settings and Notification, Login to GUI.1. Navigate to Device Configuration2. Select Email option3. Click on Configure button available on right top corner.4. Enter the required details for below fields on Pop Up.

5. SMTP server : snmp.mycompany.local6. Mail from : [email protected]. Reply to : [email protected]. Enable Email Notification : YesRegistered Email Addresses and respective events :1. [email protected] ALERT2. [email protected] ALERT3. [email protected] INFO4. [email protected] WARN5. [email protected] WARN

#LICENSE configuration1. license add QD9A BQMA H9P9 KHWY UJA5 HW6V Y9JL KMPL B89H MZVU DXAU 2CSM GHTG L762 5KF5 HJVM KJVG D5KM EFVWTSNJ RKLL PUWS JMQK 98S8 NJY5 TWVR ZWWA A6S3 CXCM G5NQ RFMU SKG2 3MPL QYEG QWCT HD92 E2J5 DJDA ZQCA PNGA 3ZLQENT5 EZWD LEMX JUBW SEFJ EXRC 2FCE ZEKV UKX5 3FJF J945 L88K XUUA QTTY JDU4 56GF EH3B AT8K 35PU"IPP12IZ570886A77C3B46999914 EH995B HP D2D4112/D2D4312 Backup Sys Upgr Kit"2. license add QDQC AQMA H9PQ KHUY VRB5 HW6N Y9JL KMPL B89H MZVU DXAU 2CSM GHTG L762 7KF5 UPVA KJVT D5KM EFVWTSNJ ZKTN MUGT JMQK 98S8 NJA7 TWVR ZWWA A6S3 LQDN W4FU 8F5L WJWC 388D 9ZPJ QWCT HD92 E2J5 DJDA ZQCA PNGA 3ZLQENT5 EZWD LEMX JUBW SEFJ EXRC 2FCE ZEKV UKX5 3FJF J945 L88K XUUA YSL9 ND9E XGCN ADXF B48S XFM9"IPP12IZ970886A9054ED860032B BB862AAE"3. license add 9DAG AQMA H9P9 GHW3 VVA5 HW6V Y9JL KMPL B89H MZVU DXAU 2CSM GHTG L762 LKNZ VKFE KJVT D5KM EFVW

230 Configuration save and restore process



TSNJ ZKTN NUGS JMQK 98S8 5JQ5 TWVR YXWA A663 SUDM W4RY FEF4 GJ5W ZSPC QYYS QWCT HD92 E2J5 DJDA ZQCA PNGA 3ZLQENT5 EZWD LEMX JUBW SEFJ EXRC 2FCE ZEKV UKX5 3FJF J945 L88K XUUA YSL9 ND9E XGCV ADXF B48S XFM9"IPP12IZ377086A89657B5038BD1 BB863AAE"4. license add 9DQE BQMA H9PA 8HWY VJA5 HW6N Y9JL KMPL B89H MZVU DXAU 2CSM GHTG L762 FKF3 VLF9 KJVT D5KM EFVWTSNJ JK3L 8UWS JMQK 98S8 5JY5 TWVR ZWWA M65U CXCN G559 BGEM GKB6 3TP2 9YEK QWCT HD92 E2J5 DJDA ZQCA PNGA 3ZLQENT5 MZWD YEMX QMUE SXA7 7QTT SFJV 68LZ MHCZ 5ELN J945 S88K XUU4 8KTK F3QU

Settings restored after automatic recoveryThe following configuration settings are restored by uploading and applying the configuration zipfile through the CLI:• Virtual Tape Library: All configuration settings for the virtual tape library device are restored,

namely:

◦ Emulation type of library

◦ Number of cartridge slots

◦ Number and emulation type of drives

◦ Cartridge size and barcode length

◦ Fibre channel or iSCSI settings

After recovery cartridges are not created in the cartridge slots, they are created after the libraryrecreation is complete using the Create cartridges function.• CIFS shares: All configuration settings and shares are recreated, namely:

Authentication type (None, User, AD)◦

◦ Local user accounts (for User authentication)

◦ Share name and description

◦ Share user access settings• NFS shares: All configuration settings and shares are recreated, namely:

Host access lists◦

◦ NAS share names

◦ Share host access setting• Replication: The information recovered is as follows:

Replication local appliance settings: Maximum concurrent jobs, Sync progress logging,Out of sync notification settings, Port number settings

◦

◦ Replication partner target appliances (IP and Ports)

◦ Blackout and throttling window settings

◦ Source appliance permissions

◦ Replication target share/library mappingsReplication source appliance mappings are not restored because this would result in deletionof content on replication target devices after recovery completes. Replication mappings canbe recreated after the recovery completes in order to recover replica data to therepaired/replaced appliance.

Settings restored after automatic recovery 231



• StoreOnce Catalyst: The information recovered is as follows:

Store name◦

◦ Access control list

◦ Local appliance settings: Port number and Maximum concurrent jobs

◦ Blackout and throttling window settings for copy• Housekeeping: The information recovered is as follows:

Blackout and throttling window settings

Performing a configuration save A configuration save operation can be done at any time using the following process:1. Log into the StoreOnce CLI using any IP address that can access the appliance. Use a login

account with administrator privileges.2. Run the command:

config save devices

This command will complete immediately and return to the prompt, the configuration settingswill be created in the background.3. Run the command:

config show list

Check that the configuration file has been created; it will only appear in the list once thecreation process is complete.

4. To retrieve the configuration file from the appliance, SFTP into the appliance using an SFTPclient and a login account of an appliance administrator.

5. From the /config directory copy the configuration zip file and associated text file to a localPC.

Prerequisites for a configuration restoreBefore restoring the configuration verify that:• All hardware is physically repaired or replaced with no defects (such as failed disks).• There are no configured devices (VTL, NAS or StoreOnce Catalyst devices).• All settings in the configuration text file are manually restored.

Restoring from the configuration zip fileTo restore only StoreOnce device settings (VTL, NAS, StoreOnce Catalyst, Replication andHousekeeping), apply the configuration zip file as follows:1. The saved configuration zip file is in theconfig folder on the appliance.

NOTE: This assumes that the appliance was not repaired or replaced; no QR was necessaryso the configuration file is still on the system. It is advisable to use theconfig show listcommand to check for the name of the latest zip file.

2. Run the StoreOnce CLI command:config restore devices <config_filename>

232 Configuration save and restore process



3. After configuration, recovery backups can be configured and replication mappingsre-established in order to reverse replicate data back to the appliance (see replicationinformation in the user guide)

WARNING! QR is a complete re-image of the device and is only used for catastrophic issues ormajor software updates where compatibility cannot be maintained.

NOTE: To restore network or other device management settings use the procedure described in

the following section. It is also the procedure you use after a QR.

Performing a full configuration restore on a StoreOnce Backup systemRefer to the appropriate HP StoreOnce Backup Maintenance and Service guide for your productfor instructions on performing a full configuration restore and recommendations on contacting HPSupport when carrying out a configuration restore in conjunction with a Quick Restore.

Deleting configuration files from an applianceThe saved configuration files remain on the StoreOnce appliance after creation and after a recoveryoperation. They can be safely left on the appliance or can be identified and deleted using the

following StoreOnce CLI commands:config show list

config delete <config_filename>

Performing a full configuration restore on a StoreOnce Backup system 233



17 Storage managementThis chapter describes:• The storage RAID configuration• How to identify a failed disk• How to replace a disk• How to rebuild the RAID if several disks fail• How to expand storage after adding a new shelf• How to expand storage using a previously configured shelf

NOTE: For instructions on how to connect additional storage by adding a new capacity upgradeenclosure (not available with the StoreOnce 2700 or 2620 Backup system), please see the printeddocumentation supplied with the additional storage.NOTE: It is not recommended to add an enclosure containing disks that already have a storageconfiguration present, for example, an enclosure moved from another StoreOnce appliance. If thisis done, the previous configuration must be deleted from this enclosure before expanding thestorage.

RAID configuration All HP StoreOnce Backup systems are supplied with their base storage already configured for use,this storage comprises the disks in the storage system itself. On some models there are dedicateddisks for the operating system; on others the operating system and backup data storage are all onthe same disks.• The HP StoreOnce 4900 head server unit has two disks only, which are used for the operating

system and filesystem. If one disk fails, the server unit will continue to operate but the faileddisk should be replaced immediately. The HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup system always requiresone disk enclosure with base storage of 11 disks for user data + 4 hot spare disks. Up to fiveadditional expansion kits may be added to the disks in the first disk enclosure to increase thebackup data capacity, also RAID 6. These disks are configured in RAID 6 pools, such thattwo disks per pool can be lost without loss of backup data.One further disk enclosure can be added to the system, and is connected to the second RAIDcontroller card. Up to five additional expansion kits may also be added to the disks in thesecond disk enclosure to increase the backup data capacity, and the storage expansion modelas the same as for the first disk enclosure.There are two hot spare disks in each drawer of the disk enclosure, bays 34 and 35. If a datadisk fails, the hot spare disk will automatically be used until the failed disk is replaced. It willonly be returned to its status of hot spare disk when the data has fully rebuilt on the replacementdisk. The hot spare disks provide RAID 6 redundancy for the volumes within each drawer.However, it is important to replace failed or predictive failing disks as soon as possible. Ifmore than two disks fail in the same pool, the system will fail and data will be lost. See theHP StoreOnce 6500 Backup system Maintenance and Service guide for more detailedinformation.

• The HP StoreOnce 4700 head server unit has two disks only, which are used for the operatingsystem and filesystem. If one disk fails, the server unit will continue to operate but the faileddisk should be replaced immediately. The HP StoreOnce 4700 Backup system always requiresone enclosure of 12 disks for user data, these disks are in a RAID 6 set, such that two disksper enclosure can be lost without loss of backup data. Up to seven additional enclosures maybe added to increase the backup data capacity, also RAID 6. The HP StoreOnce 4700 supportsdaisy chaining.

234 Storage management



• The HP StoreOnce 4500 Backup system has 12 disks in the storage system itself; two of thesedisks (disk 1 and 2) are dedicated for use by the operating system and are in a mirroredconfiguration, such that one disk can be lost without the failure of the system. The remaining10 disks in the system are in a RAID 6 set which contains the backup data, two disks can belost in this system without loss of the backup data.The HP StoreOnce 4500 Backup system can be expanded with up to three additional enclosuresof 12 disks to increase the backup data capacity. Two expansion options are available, a24TB Capacity Upgrade Kit and a 48TB Capacity Expansion Kit. These disks are in a RAID6 set, such that two disks per enclosure can be lost without loss of backup data. The 48TBenclosure includes a hot spare disk in Slot 12; when not in use its LED indicators will be offand it will show as a spare disk in the Hardware tree. This spare provides an extra level ofresiliency required with large capacity disks to allow for the longer RAID rebuild times, whichallow a larger window for multiple drive failure events. The 24TB expansion does not havethe hot spare and all disks are active in the RAID.

• HP StoreOnce 4420/4210 and 4430/4420 Backup systems all have 12 disks in the storagesystem itself; two of these disks (disk 1 and 2) are dedicated for use by the operating systemand are in a mirrored configuration, such that one disk can be lost without the failure of thesystem. The remaining 10 disks in the system are in a RAID 6 set which contains the backupdata, two disks can be lost in this system without loss of the backup data.

• The HP StoreOnce 4420/4210 and 4430/4420 Backup systems can be expanded withadditional enclosures of 12 disks to increase the backup data capacity, these disks are in aRAID 6 set, such that two disks per enclosure can be lost without loss of backup data. The HPStoreOnce 4430 supports up to four expansion shelves; daisy chaining; is not supported.

• The HP StoreOnce 2900 Backup system has 6 disks in the storage system itself; these disks(disk bays 1 to 6) are configured as a RAID 6 system, and the operating system and backupdata are both stored on this RAID set. Two disks can be lost out of this RAID set without theloss of the operating system or backup data. The HP StoreOnce 2900 Backup system can beexpanded by installing 6 more disks in to disk bays 7 – 12; these disks are configured as aRAID 6 system and store only backup data. Two disks can be lost out of this RAID set without

the loss of backup data. It is important to replace failed or predictive failing disks as soon aspossible. If more than two disks fail out of the base RAID set in disk bays 1 to 6 or the expandedstorage RAID set in disk bays 7 – 12, the system will fail and data will be lost.

• HP StoreOnce 2700 and 2620 Backup systems have 4 disks in a RAID 5 system, the operatingsystem and backup data are both stored on this RAID Set. RAID 5 allows for a single drivefailure without loss of either the backup data or OS partitions.

IMPORTANT: It is very important that failed disks are replaced promptly.In order to ensure that you are alerted to disk failures ensure that either or both of SNMP trapsand email alerts are configured so that in the event of a disk failure you are notified immediatelyand can take action to replace the disks.

Note that ALL enclosures of storage must be working for the system to operate; if the RAID fails oany one enclosure due to exceeding the maximum amount of failed disks in a pool then ALL datais lost. In the case of the HP StoreOnce 2700 and 2620 Backup system, if more than one diskfails then the data and operating system are lost and a “Quick Restore” of the appliance OS willbe required before the unit can be used again.

Identifying a failed disk WARNING! Replace failed or predictive failed disks as soon as possible. Any subsequent diskfailure within the same pool or array will result in complete data loss.

Identifying a failed disk 235



Using the StoreOnce GUIIf you configured recipients for SNMP traps or email alerts, they will be notified of a disk failure.Use the Hardware page of the GUI to find detailed information, see Hardware (page 152) .Use the GUI to:• HP StoreOnce 2610/20, 4210/20 and 4420/30: Access the Hardware Problem Report to

identify problems with a failed or failing disk; see “Hardware Problem Report” (page 150).• Access the appropriate Hardware page for details for the device.

HP 4900: Hardware — Storage Clusters — Storage Cluster n — Drive Enclosure — SubEnclosure (Drawer n) — Drives

◦

◦ HP 2700, 2900, 4500 and 4700: Hardware — Storage — Storage Cluster — DriveEnclosure — Drive

◦ HP 2620, 4210/4220 and 4420/4430: Hardware — SA_controller_n — SA_enclosure_n— Hard Disk

The disk fault LED (amber) will also be illuminated on the disk carrier.• For all systems other than the HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup system, you can use the Beacon

LED On button on this page to turn the LED on the front of the disk on, which makes it easierto identify and replace.

NOTE: HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup: If the disk is in the server node, its details are underthe Server branch of the Hardware tree in Hardware — Server — Server Storage. There areno buttons on this page.

Using the StoreOnce CLIThe following StoreOnce CLI commands can also be used to identify specific disk locations, tonavigate the hardware tree to identify the disk and enclosure, and to flash the Beacon LED on andoff.hardware show problems

hardware show status

beacon <dev_id><on/off>

Replacing a hot plug disk in a 4900 disk enclosureThis section applies to HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup systems only.

Important Safety information

WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the equipment, ensure that onlyone hard drive drawer is extended at a time.

When adding hard drives to the hard drive drawer, observe the following general guidelines:• When the drawer is opened, the cooling fans in the enclosure run at full-speed. This is normal.• Hard drives are sensitive to excessive vibration. Use care when opening and closing the

drawer.• NEVER leave the drawer open for any length of time. A single drawer should be opened only

for maintenance and storage expansion.• Verify that the drives are fully seated before closing the drawer.




• The drawer is fully closed when the fans slow down to their normal speed.• The drawer should be closed with the handle in the released position.

CAUTION: Remember to close the handle after closing the drawer

To install the drives1. Use the StoreOnce User Interface to identify which drive needs replacing.

For example, to identify the disks installed in drawer 1, expand the Hardware tree:Hardware — Storage Cluster 1— Drive Enclosures — Sub Enclosure (Drawer 1) — Drives

A list of installed drives is displayed with their disk bay locations.

2. Open the hard drive drawer for the relevant drawer. Pull the handle up (1) and out (2) toextend the drawer (3).

Figure 18 Opening the disk drawer

Replacing a hot plug disk in a 4900 disk enclosure 237





5. Close the hard drive drawer. You will hear it click into place when it is securely closed. Thefans will return to normal speed when both drawers are properly closed.

WARNING! Pinch hazard—Keep hands out of front and rear of chassis when closing harddrive drawers.

CAUTION: To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the diskenclosure for an extended period of time with the drawer open.CAUTION: To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the diskenclosure unless all bays are populated with either a disk or a disk blank.

If several disks failIf more than two disks fail in the same pool or 6–disk array, all data is lost and not recoverable.However, if several disk failures are reported at once, it is possible that the disks are not failingbut some other component has failed. In these situations action should be taken to rule out thepossibilities of loose/broken cables, faulty RAID controllers or powered-down Capacity UpgradeKits BEFORE replacing the disks. If the problem is caused by components other than the disks, it

is possible that no actual data loss has occurred.CAUTION: Although there is a Rebuild this RAID set button available on the GUI Hardwarepages, this feature should only be used under the supervision of HP Support. This button is notavailable with the HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup system.

In the event of multiple disk failures on a single enclosure all backup data will be lost so it is veryimportant that if disk failures do occur they are dealt with swiftly and disks are replaced.

NOTE: The head unit of the StoreOnce 4900 and 4700 contains two disks only and is not aRAID 6 set; if both disks fail, the server has failed.HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup systems have four hot spare disks in each disk enclosure, and support

up to six pools of 11 disks, but only two may fail in the same pool without data loss.In StoreOnce Backup systems that have a head unit shelf with 12 disks, up to two disks may failin slots 3 to 12. The other two disks are used for the operating system files and support one diskfailure only.In StoreOnce Backup systems that support a 12–disk expansion storage shelf up to two disks mayfail in slots 1 to 12.Multiple disk failure is not supported in the StoreOnce 2700/2620 Backup system.

After the failed disks are replaced it is necessary to remove the old filesystem configuration andrebuild a new one.1. Use the following StoreOnce CLI to remove all configured storage on the appliance (except

that used by the operating system):hardware delete storage all

2. This command cleans up all filesystem configuration and delete logical drives (LUNs) on allstorage devices.

WARNING! THIS COMMAND COMPLETELY DELETES ALL CONFIGURED STORAGat any time even if the storage is healthy.

If several disks fail 239



3. After the delete command has completed rebuilding the storage system use the followingStoreOnce CLI commands to discover and add storage to the systemhardware prepare storage

hardware add storage

This will configure both the storage in the appliance (base storage) and any attached expansionshelves, if licenses are present on the appliance.

Expanding storage after adding storagePlease refer to the Capacity Expansion Guide supplied with the Capacity Expansion kit for detailedinstructions about licensing additional storage and expanding storage on the StoreOnce Backupsystem.

Expanding storage by adding a previously configured expansion shelfNOTE: This section is not relevant for HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup systems, which have diskenclosures and not expansion shelves..

There are two instances where it may be necessary to expand storage using shelves that have

previously been configured:• There has been a catastrophic event and the filesystem is broken. It has been necessary to

run the QR process to restore all storage (on the head unit and any expansion shelves) to thedefault state of a clean appliance. In this scenario all storage must be deleted before beingadded back into the configuration. The process is the same as rebuilding the RAID set aftermultiple disk failure. See If several disks fail (page 239).

• The QR process has been run on a system, but some of the storage was switched off duringthe process. It is possible to integrate the missing storage into the restored system by deletingthe LUN of the shelf that was omitted. (On the StoreOnce CLI and GUI, the LUN details arefound in the sa_logical drive element of the hardware tree — under the sa_RAIDset entry foreach enclosure. For HP 4500 and 4700 systems, the LUN details are found in the StorageCluster — Pool — Volume element of the Hardware tree.)This process would also apply in the very unlikely event that a user was moving shelves betweenmultiple StoreOnce Backup systems. Be aware, if doing this, that it could cause complicationswith storage licensing.

The following process must be completed prior to following the normal “Storage Expansion” processfor new blank disk enclosures. If an attempt is made to add this storage enclosure without firstdeleting the LUN (logical drive), the add process will fail and report that the storage was not in asuitable state for addition.

IMPORTANT: This process applies only when “adding” one or more enclosures with a pre-existingLUN layout on its disks. It should not be used when replacing individual disks in an enclosure orrebuilding the RAIDset after multiple disk failure.1. Connect and power on the expansion enclosure that is to be used, ensuring that it is attached

to the correct enclosure port. Then wait 5 minutes for the storage monitor to recognize thenewly attached device.

2. Run the StoreOnce CLI command:hardware show problems

3. This will display warnings for all enclosures and you can identify the SA enclosure that iscausing a problem because it has an alien storage configuration.

4. To display more details about the problem enclosure run the StoreOnce CLI command:

hardware show status <problem_enclosure> details




5. Look at the diagnostic message and scroll down to the logical drive section to locate the UUIDof the logical drive that is not configured.

NOTE: It is also possible to view the hardware tree from the StoreOnce GUI and expandthe tree to locate the storage enclosure that contains the alien LUN.

6. After identifying the logical unit that needs to be deleted, note its UUID because you will needto specify this in the delete command.

7. Run the following StoreOnce CLI command to delete the LUN:hardware delete storage <UUID>

The command will complete successfully if the LUN can be deleted i.e. it is not mounted.8. After the delete command has completed rebuilding the storage system use the following

StoreOnce CLI commands to discover and add storage to the system:hardware prepare storage

hardware add storage

This will configure both the storage in the appliance (base storage) and any attached expansionshelves, if licenses are present on the appliance.

Expanding storage by adding a previously configured expansion shelf 241



18 Basic troubleshooting• Accessing the CLI (page 242)• Password problems (page 243)• Pulling a Support Ticket (page 243)• Licensing (page 243)• Multiple users (page 244)• Connecting to the StoreOnce Backup System from the backup application (page 244)• Timeout problems with NAS CIFS shares (page 244)• NFS State handle error (page 245)• Backup or replication fails (page 245)• Catalyst troubleshooting (page 246)• Performance (page 246)• StoreOnce Backup System configuration problems (page 246)• Upgrade licenses (page 247)

Accessing the CLIMany of the topics in this section require access to the StoreOnce Command Line Interface (CLI).They cannot be executed from the GUI. There is a separate StoreOnce CLI Reference Guide, whichyou should use for more detailed information. However, a brief summary of how to access theStoreOnce CLI is also included in this guide.The user access is the same as the GUI, with the same roles. The administrator user has access toall available CLI commands. The operator user can view status and configurations but is not ableto make configuration changes.

To access the CLIThe StoreOnce CLI can be accessed:• Remotely: using assh session to the Management Console (ssh client applications, such as

PuTTY, are freely available from the internet). This is the normal access type.ssh <username>@<IP_address> where the <IP_address> is one of the addresseslisted under IP address on the StoreOnce page .

• If necessary, by a physical direct connection: connect a keyboard (USB or PS2, if available)and VGA console to the appropriate ports on the rear of the StoreOnce Backup system. Seethe appropriate HP StoreOnce Installation and Configuration Guide or HP StoreOnce Maintenance and Service Guide for details.

NOTE: When accessing the CLI directly, ignore any Linux dump logs. Press Enter to displaythe CLI login prompt.

242 Basic troubleshooting



Figure 21 Physical connections to HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup

USB connectors2 VGA connector1

Figure 22 Physical connections to HP StoreOnce 4700/4500 Backup

VGA connector3PS2 connectors1 and 2

USB connectors4 and 5

Password problems Administrator users may reset passwords for operator users.

If the administrator credentials are accidentally lost, it is possible to reset the administrator passwordusing the account “hpresetpassword”. This account is also password protected, it can only usedfrom the console and the end-user is recommended to change this password after installation andstore it in an offline Password Security tool. See the HP StoreOnce Backup CLI Reference guide for more details.

Pulling a Support Ticket A support ticket is a snapshot in time of the StoreOnce product, showing the configuration, statusand health of the product, as well as historical events for use with troubleshooting the product. Itis also called “a collect”.It also contains lower level tracelogs for the use of HP engineers.It can be manually collected by the customer in two ways from the Management Console:• From the GUI (administrator and operator user). See Support Ticket (page 207).• From the StoreOnce CLI (Admin user only). See the HP StoreOnce CLI Reference Guide .

NOTE: If a kernel crash occurs, an automatic ticket will be generated. A ticket will be producedwith the filename:tkt_<datestamp>_<crashed nodename>.zip

Licensing problemsThe Instant-on demo license may be enabled when the system is configured. This license enables

StoreOnce Catalyst and Replication for 90 days.Password problems 243



To continue using these features, separate licenses must be purchased for StoreOnce Catalyst andReplication and applied within the 90 day period. If they are not, data is not lost but:StoreOnce 4900, 4700, 4500, 2900 and 2700:• Replication: Replication Target libraries will become read only.• Catalyst: StoreOnce Catalyst jobs will fail.Use StoreOnce CLI commands to show the current license status and apply the demo and individuallicenses. See the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide and “Licensing” (page 17)for more information.

Multiple usersThe HP StoreOnce Management Console supports multiple GUI and CLI sessions. However, werecommend:• No more than 8 active operator sessions for the GUI• No more than 16 active operator sessions for the CLI• No more than 1 active administrator session to ensure there is no confusion when configuration

changes are made

Currently, you cannot see which users are logged in. Theaccounts show command will list allthe user accounts defined for the HP StoreOnce Backup system. For each account the authoritylevel is provided.

Connecting to the StoreOnce Backup system from the backup applicationMake sure you have the latest version or software patches for the backup application. Please seehttp://www.hp.com/go/ebs for supported applications.Stop and restart the backup application services after the backup device has been discovered. Ifyou still cannot access the device, check Device Manager to make sure it is accessible from thehost.

• For iSCSI devices: Make sure that the iSCSI initiator is connected to the devices and log onto them, if they are not, configure them on the Targets tab of the iSCSI Initiator.• For Fibre Channel devices: Models with an 8Gb Fibre Channel card have a theoretical limit

of 255 devices per Fibre Channel port on a host or switch; models with 4Gb Fibre Channelcard have a theoretical limit of 127 devices per Fibre Channel port on a host or switch.

NOTE: There are practical limitations on the number of devices that each host or HBA can access.It is possible to configure more drive and library devices than a host can access. The limit for

Windows or Linux hosts using the iSCSI interface is 64. Although the Fibre Channel connectionsupports a greater theoretical number of devices per Fibre Channel port on a host or switch, HPrecommends that no more than 64 devices are configured for use by a single host.

Timeout problems with NAS CIFS sharesBy default, Windows CIFS timeout is set low for NAS backup implementations. This can lead tovarious error message related to lost connection to the share, unrecoverable write errors or timeoutproblems resulting backup job failures. It is recommended to add or to increase the “SessTimeout”value from the default of 45 (seconds) to 300 (five minutes).By increasing the timeout, it ensures that the Windows CIFS timeout does not cause your backupapplication to prematurely timeout the running job.






NOTE: This can resolve issues resulting from timeouts, but is not exclusively the only reason forsuch failures. A large number of ‘out of sequence’ writes causing slow response times within theproduct often can be the root cause. Further analysis may be required should increasing the timeoutnot be successful.

In order to increase the timeout:1. From the Start menu, click Run....

2. Type regedit in the Open: field and click OK .3. Expand and locate the registry subtree as follows:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ SYSTEM \ CurrentControlSet \ Services \LanmanWorkstatioParameters

4. Add a new REG_DWORD key with the name of SessTimeout.5. Set the timeout value. It is recommended to initially set the timeout value at 600 and then

change the value according to the situation of your machine.6. Reboot the client.

NFS State handle errorNOTE: NetBIOS name resolution is not supported on CIFS shares.The following sequence will cause problems when connecting to a NAS share.1. Create an NFS share and mount it on a Linux box.2. Delete the share on the StoreOnce Backup system without unmounting it from the Linux box.3. Recreate the share again with the same name.In this scenario, the Linux client will assign a new set of inodes to the new share, but when tryingto access the old mount point it will use the previous set of inodes and will therefore not manageto connect.Reboot the host Linux system and the connection will work again.

If backup or replication failsBackup failsCheck the system Events (at the bottom of the navigation tree). One reason for a backup failure isthat the system has reached 90% of storage capacity used. A warning is generated at 70% andat each increase of 5%. After 85% the warnings come at smaller increases. At 95%, the warningsbecome alerts and are sent at each increase of 1%. When capacity reaches 99% full, the systembecomes read-only.HP also strongly recommends checking backup application error logs. These issues can result inerrors:• Exceeding the maximum concurrent jobs• Exceeding the maximum number of concurrent open files for NAS• Exceeding the total number of files in a NAS share• Reconfiguring devices whilst backups are in progress• Deleting replication mappings

Replication failsIf replication needs to take place through a firewall, the network administrator will need to open(TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Data protocol) to allow the replication trafficto pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup systems.

NFS State handle error 245



If the replication Source Appliance fails and goes offline whilst it was performing a NAS replicationjob, the replication target share appliance may be left in an inconsistent state. This state may resultin failure to recover from some files in the share or perform a list of files in the share becauserelationships between files and folders have been lost. This will automatically be repaired by thetarget appliance as soon as it detects the loss of the source appliance, however it may take up to10 minutes to complete this repair during which time the share will not be available for access.If some files are failing to replicate and remain out of sync for long periods of time, check that thebackup application is not holding open those files. This can be done by checking that there areno queued or paused jobs in the backup application, or restarting backup application services. Ifneither action resolves the problem, reboot the backup application server.

StoreOnce Catalyst troubleshootingSince StoreOnce Catalyst is designed to allow maximum control to the client application, anyproblems should be remedied by checking job configuration on the client. In the unlikely event thatthe StoreOnce Catalyst Status display asFault , contact HP support services for further advice.

IMPORTANT: If StoreOnce Catalyst operations need to take place through a firewall, the networkadministrator will need to open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Data protocol)to allow the StoreOnce Catalyst traffic to pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup system.

PerformanceYour HP StoreOnce Backup system is designed for high performance backup and restore operationsaccording to the specification documented. However, it requires careful configuration.There are many reasons why you may not see the performance you expected from your HPStoreOnce Backup system.• Your own network speed or disk access is not fast enough to allow streaming of data.• Your backup application is not optimized. For example, there are not enough backup streams

configured to achieve optimum performance.•

Your HP StoreOnce Backup system is not optimized for your network and application.NetworkThe HP StoreOnce Backup system is designed to be run on a 1Gb or 10Gb network. Performancewill be reduced if a 10/100BaseT network is used. The LEDs on the front panel (1–Gb ports only)and on the network ports and also warnings on the Management Console will indicate the networkspeeds at which the device is operating.

StoreOnce Backup system configuration problemsI cannot see a newly created VTL device

When you create a new device on the HP StoreOnce Backup system, the host will not be able tosee the device until you connect manually to it using the iSCSI Initiator or it has been zoned correctlyon the Fibre Channel SAN. If you cannot see the device, check Device Manager to make sure itis visible from the host.

I cannot see additional slots from the backup application When you create additional slots for an autoloader/library on the HP StoreOnce Backup system,you may need to restart services on the backup application so that it can see the new slots.




I cannot recover the configuration fileYou can only recover a configuration file to an HP StoreOnce Backup system if no devices (NASshares or Virtual Tape Libraries) have been created on that appliance. This option should only beused in emergencies, when the HP StoreOnce Backup system has lost both disks and all diskconfiguration.

Upgrade licensesIf you have installed the Instant-On demo license, you should purchase and install the appropriatefull licenses before the Instant-On license expires. See Licensing (page 17).

Can I transfer the License To Use to a different HP StoreOnce Backup system?No. The LTU is tied uniquely to the serial number of your HP StoreOnce hardware. If your hardwareserial number changes (by swapping out the unit motherboard), the LTU must be transferred to thenew hardware via the HP Licensing website. A new LTU is generated, which must then be appliedand activated via the Web Management Interface on the repaired/replaced system.

Upgrade licenses 247



19 Advanced troubleshootingMore detailed troubleshooting information can be found at http://www.hp.com/support . Thissection covers the following topics:• VLAN networking problems (page 248)• Software update process (page 248)• Firmware updates (page 249)• Using the 10-Gb ports (page 249)• “Power On/Off problems” (page 249)• If the Backup System runs out of space (page 250)• “Reduced performance using Data in Flight Encryption” (page 250)• Cannot access a storage shelf (page 250)• Replacement of hardware (page 251)• Quick Restore process (page 251)

Important information about serial numbers (HP StoreOnce 4700 and4900 only)

It is very important to use the correct serial number when contacting HP Support. There is a serialnumber for your product which can be found only on the labels and/or toe tags that come withthe product. It is not stored electronically within the GUI.

IMPORTANT: The serial numbers that currently appear on some GUI screens are for internal useor for lower level hardware components. These serial numbers will not be recognized by HP Supportfor warranty use. Do not use them.

VLAN networking problemsHP StoreOnce Backup systems support VLAN tagging.The following guidelines apply:• The VLAN tagging interfaces can be configured on both single and bonded interfaces.• The user can configure a maximum of 128 different VLANs per platform; they may be

consecutive or non-consecutive.• The user can configure up to 128 different VLANs on one interface or divide the 128 different

VLANs over multiple interfaces.• Each VLAN tag interface is configured using the VLAN ID index, which is the same as the

switch VLAN ID number and must be an integer from 2 to 4094.• Each VLAN tag interface can configured for use with one IPv4 and one IPv6 subnet. For

example, if a VLAN tag ID was configured for use with ports eth 0 and eth1 on IPv4, it canalso be configured for use on IPv6 with that Port Set but it cannot be used with any other PortSet.

Software update processSoftware updates can only be performed through the StoreOnce CLI using the administrator useraccount.Software updates are delivered to customers in the form of a single rpm package, which may

contain multiple rpms.248 Advanced troubleshooting

http://www.hp.com/support




A software update is NOT an online process. Services will shutdown to perform the updates, sothe whole appliance will be offline for a period of time (approximately 30 minutes).Please refer to the Maintenance and Service Guide for your product and to the detailed releasenotes provided with each software release for specific instructions on downloading and performinga software update.

Firmware updates

Firmware updates for system components, such as hard disk drives and BIOS, are included in thesoftware update package, but they are not implemented as part of the software update process.You will use the StoreOnce CLI commandhardware update firmware to implement firmwareupdates. See the HP StoreOnce CLI Reference Guide for more information on using the commandand the HP Maintenance and Service Guide for your product for more specific details regardingfirmware updates.

Using the 10GbE ports (HP StoreOnce 4900/4700/4500/44xx)The default setting is for only the 1GbE ports to be configured; the 10GbE ports are not configured.If required, the 10GbE ports must be added to the network configuration, see the HP StoreOnce Installation and Configuration guide for more details.

Although a warning will be displayed, it is possible to disable network ports. You can only recoverthis from the console screen by directly attaching a monitor and keyboard to the HP StoreOnceBackup system.If data transfer seems slow:• Check that the 10GbE ports are configured.• Also, make sure that the hosts are configured correctly to select the 10GbE network for data

transfer.• The LEDs on the 10GbE card (at the rear of the HP StoreOnce Backup system) also help identify

network activity. Or use iLO to monitor the network ports.

Power On/Off ProblemsHP StoreOnce Backup system shuts down automaticallyIf the HP StoreOnce Backup system has found a problem with the internal hardware which requiresthe device to shutdown to avoid further hardware problems, the System Health LED on the frontpanel will probably be flashing RED. Reboot and watch for errors on boot up.

HP StoreOnce Backup system does not boot up correctlyCheck the Power LED on the front panel.If the Power LED is OFF:• Check power is connected to the HP StoreOnce Backup system and is on.• The PSU may be faulty.If the Power LED is AMBER:• Power on the HP StoreOnce Backup system using the Power button.• If it shuts down again, see (page 249) .If the Power LED is GREEN but you cannot log in. Reboot and check for hardware errors as theHP StoreOnce Backup system device boots up.

Firmware updates 249



HP StoreOnce Backup system System Health LED is flashing REDOne of the two power supplies is faulty or not connected to power at power on time, causing awarning condition. Check the LED on the PSU to ensure it is not faulty (it should be green). Ensureboth power supplies are connected and reboot to clear this LED. The HP StoreOnce Backup systemwill work satisfactorily with one power supply, but without any redundancy. It is recommended topower on the second power supply or replace the power supply as soon as possible.

Cannot authenticate an iSCSI sessionCHAP authentication is used within HP StoreOnce Backup systems that support iSCSI. For detailsof the settings on the Microsoft iSCSI initiator and the HP StoreOnce Management Console, seealso the HP StoreOnce Backup system Installation and Configuration Guide .

If the HP StoreOnce Backup system runs out of disk space A warning message is generated when the HP StoreOnce Backup system reaches 90% capacity.If you have a StoreOnce 4900 Backup system, you can purchase and install Capacity Expansionkits for the disk enclosure; the 44TB expansion kit provides 11 4TB-disks; the 60TB expansion kitprovides an additional disk enclosure.If you have the older, 12–disk array base units, you can purchase and install a Capacity UpgradeKit to expand your capacity. This is an expansion shelf containing 12 2TB-disks. If you have doneso and are still out of space, make sure that you have fully expanded the storage capacity. (TheHP StoreOnce 2700 and 26xx Series do not support connection of a Capacity Upgrade Kit.) Seethe documentation provided with the Capacity Expansion Kit for detailed instructions.Options for creating space include:• Review your backup jobs to see if you can reduce the size of backup or retention time.• Use the backup application job settings to overwrite or erase data.• Ensure Housekeeping is running and is keeping up with demand.

Reduced performance using Data in Flight EncryptionIf Data in Flight Encryption is configured on the subnet and encrypts the data traffic to all the storesusing that IP connection. Therefore, it may have an impact on performance. This is the expectedbehavior when using the IPsec protocol. View the network configuration using the CLInet showconfig command to determine if Data in Flight is configured; see the HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide .

Cannot access a storage shelf (HP StoreOnce 4xxx Backup systems)If you disconnnect a storage shelf or enclosure, you must reconnect it to the same controller port(s)to which it was originally connected.If multiple storage shelves have been configured, you must power up with all shelves attached. Ifone is not connected, none of the storage will start. Do not try to reconfigure, power off, connect,and reboot.The HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup has a system check; if it detects incorrect cabling, it will not mountthe data storage and it will not allow the StoreOnce services to start. This will be reported in thesystem Events log.

NOTE: HP StoreOnce 4210/20 and 4420/30 Backup only: Do not daisy chain storage shelves.

250 Advanced troubleshooting





20SNMPThe HP StoreOnce Backup System has the ability to act as a Network Element in an SNMP networkso that it can communicate effectively with Network Management Stations using SNMP (SimpleNetwork Management Protocol). The StoreOnce implementation of SNMP is compatible with HPSystem Insight Manager (HP-SIM) and supports SNMP 1, 2 and 3.

SNMP (Configuration)SNMP is enabled and configured using StoreOnce Management CLI commands. Please refer tothe HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI reference guide for syntax and examples.

When the SNMP feature is enabled, it reports the overall system status, via SNMP traps, as reflectedon the StoreOnce Management interface, as follows:• OK – System status is good.• Warning – Something on the system needs attention, but is not critical.• Critical – Something on the system needs immediate attention.It also reports any software status messages or hardware status messages, as reported in the event

log and email alerts or the StoreOnce Management Console.HP Systems Insight Manager

The MIBs, Management Information Bases, used to represent the information handled by the HPStoreOnce Backup system are called SEMI-MIB.mib and TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.mib and areincluded on the CD supplied with your product (they can also be downloaded from http://www.hp.com/support). These databases must be compiled and registered with HP Systems InsightManager, so that information from the StoreOnce Backup system can be transmitted to andinterpreted by the management host.There are three stages to setting up HP Systems Insight Manager for use with the HP StoreOnceBackup system:1. Register SEMI-MIB.mib and TRAP-DESTINATION-MIB within the base of MIBs supported by

HP Systems Insight Manager.2. Update the existing system type database with the new system type for the HP StoreOnce

Backup system, based on the unique system object identifier.3. Discover the HP StoreOnce Backup system under HP Systems Insight Manager

NOTE: For detailed instructions on working with HP-SIM, refer to the “HP Systems Insight Manager Technical Reference Guide ”.

Register the MIB for the HP StoreOnce Backup System1. Log on to the HP Systems Insight Manager.2. Compile SEMI-MIB.

Open a Command window and go toProgram Files\HP\Systems Insight Manager\mibs . Enter the commandmcompile SEMI-MIB.mib .

3. Register SEMI-MIB.Still in the Command window, enter the commandmxmib — a SEMI-MIB.cfg .

4. Compile TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.Open a Command window and go toProgram Files\HP\Systems Insight Manager\mibs . Enter the commandmcompile TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.mib .

252 SNMP







5. Register TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.Still in the Command window, enter the commandmxmib — aTRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.cfg .

6. Log out from the HP System Insight Manager and then log back in again.7. Check that SEMI-MIB and TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB have been registered with HP Syste

Insight Manager by selecting Options — Events — SNMP Trap Settings… on the HP-SIM Homepage.

Scroll down the list of available MIBs to locate SEMI-MIB and TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB

Update the system type database1. Log on to HP System Insight Manager, if not already logged on.2. Select Options — Manage System Types… on the Home page to display a list of all managed

system types.3. Click on New... to add a new system type.4. Define a new rule filling only required fields. as follows:

• System object identifier: 1.3.6.1.4.1.11.10.3.1.3.27• Compare rule: match• Priority: 1 (highest)• System type: Storage Device• Product Model: HP StorageWorks D2D

SNMP (Configuration) 253



5. Click OK . The HP StoreOnce Backup System will now be included as a product within thepool of managed system types. (Select Storage Device from the System Type drop-down menuto check this.)

Discover the HP StoreOnce Backup System

NOTE: Always set up the SNMP parameters on the StoreOnce Management Console beforediscovering the HP StoreOnce Backup system on HP-SIM. See the HP StoreOnce CLI Reference Guide for the complete range of SNMP commands.1. Log on to HP System Insight Manager, if not already logged on.2. Select Options — Discovery… on the Home page to display a list of systems that have already

been discovered.3. Click Edit… to configure the discovery rule for the HP StoreOnce Backup system4. Place a single IP or a range of IP addresses to discover the new machine(s) in Ping inclusion

ranges… .

254 SNMP



5. Click Credentials…, select the SNMP tab and type in the Read community string. This shouldbe the same as the Read Community string that you configured on the StoreOnce ManagementConsole. If you are using the default setting that allows everyone on the network to read thereported alerts, enter “public”. Click OK to confirm.

6. Click Save to save the discovery rule.7. To start the discovery process click Run Now.

SNMP (Configuration) 255



NOTE: If a firewall is in operation on the machine running HP Systems Insight Manager,make sure the HP StoreOnce Backup system(s) are within the firewall.

8. The discovery process adds new machine(s) to the collection of managed systems. To locatethe HP StoreOnce Backup system, enter its IP address in the Search box in the left-hand paneand click Search.

NOTE: If the discovery process fails, check that the network is working correctly and thatthe HP StoreOnce Backup system is online.

256 SNMP



21 Key ParametersThe following tables provide important specifications about the StoreOnce Backup systems.• StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700 and 4900 Backup (page 257)• StoreOnce 2610/2620, 4210/4220, 4420/4430 Backup (page 259)

NOTE: All table values assume that the StoreOnce Backup system is running the latest StoreOncesoftware.

StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700, and 4900 BackupTable 68 Key parameters for HP StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700, and 4900 Backup

4900 Backup4700 Backup4500 Backup2900 Backup2700 Backup

Capacity

602420248Minimum rawstorage capacity(TB)

560192164488Maximum rawstorage capacity(TB)

65.5201615.55.5Minimum usable(after RAID)capacity (TB)

392.9716012431.55.5Maximum usable(after RAID)capacity (TB)

System Limits

505032248Maximumnumber oflibraries, sharesand StoreOnceCatalyst Storescombined

5001921289648Maximumconcurrentinbound datastreams1

VTL

5005001289632Maximum drivesper library(D2DBS and ESLEmulation)

1638440961024102496Maximumcartridges perlibrary

8192002048003276824576768Maximumcartridges perappliance

32003200320032003200Maximumcartridge size(GB)

StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700, and 4900 Backup 257



Table 68 Key parameters for HP StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, 4700, and 4900 Backup (continued)

4900 Backup4700 Backup4500 Backup2900 Backup2700 Backup

254254254——Maximumsupporteddevices (drivesand loaders) perFC port (NPIV)

NAS

1 million1 million1 million1 million1 millionMaximum filesper NAS Share

5001921289648Maximumconcurrent NASbackup streams

StoreOnce Catalyst

9696322412Maximumconcurrentoutbound copyjobs

5001921289648Maximumconcurrent dataand inboundcopy streams

Replication

505032248Maximumreplicationappliances fan-in

88442Maximumreplicationappliancesfan-out

1616881Maximumreplication fan-inper library

11111Maximumreplicationfan-out per library

9648322412Maximumconcurrentreplication jobsas source

192124964824Maximumconcurrentreplication jobsas target

258 Key Parameters



1 This limit is not rigidly enforced, it is dependent on memory availability.

StoreOnce 2610, 2620, 4220, 4420, and 4430 BackupTable 69 Key parameters for HP StoreOnce 2610, 2620, 4220, 4420, and 4430 Backup

4430Backup

4420Backup

4220Backup

4210 FCBackup

4210 iSCSIBackup

2620 iSCSIBackup

2610 iSCSIBackup

Capacity

2010105542Minimum raw storagecapacity (TB)

924622111142Maximum raw storagecapacity (TB)

1688442.51Minimum usable (afterRAID) capacity (TB)

763818992.51Maximum usable (afterRAID) capacity (TB)

System Limits

505024161684Maximum number oflibraries, shares andStoreOnce Catalyst Storescombined

1281289664644832Overall maximumconcurrent inbound datastreams1

VTL

25625612896963216Maximum drives perlibrary/node (D2DBS andESL Emulation)

409640961024102410249696Maximum cartridges perlibrary

204800204800245761638416384768384Maximum cartridges perappliance/cluster

3200320032003200320032003200Maximum cartridge size(GB)

254254254————Maximum supporteddevices (drives andloaders) per FC port(NPIV)

NAS

1 million1 million1 million1million1 million1 million1 millionMaximum files per NASShare

1281286464644832Maximum concurrent NASbackup streams

StoreOnce Catalyst

48482424241212Maximum concurrentoutbound copy jobs

1921929696964848Maximum concurrent dataand inbound copy jobs

Replication

StoreOnce 2610, 2620, 4220, 4420, and 4430 Backup 259



Table 69 Key parameters for HP StoreOnce 2610, 2620, 4220, 4420, and 4430 Backup (continued)

4430Backup

4420Backup

4220Backup

4210 FCBackup

4210 iSCSIBackup

2620 iSCSIBackup

2610 iSCSIBackup

505024161684Maximum replicationappliances fan-in

8844422Maximum replicationappliances fan-out

161688811Maximum replicationfan-in per VTL library

1111111Maximum replicationfan-out per VTL library

48482424241212Maximum concurrentreplication jobs as source

96964848482424Maximum concurrentreplication jobs as target

1 This limit is not rigidly enforced, it is dependant on memory availability.

260 Key Parameters



22 Support and other resourcesContacting HP

For worldwide technical support information, see the HP Support Center:http://www.hp.com/go/hpscBefore contacting HP, collect the following information:• Product model names and numbers• Technical support registration number (if applicable)• Product serial numbers• Error messages• Operating system type and revision level• Detailed questions

Related informationProduct documentation

For the most recent user documentation, see the HP Enterprise Storage Information Library websitewww.hp.com/go/storage/docsSelect HP StoreOnce Backup and then select your product.The following documents provide information about the HP StoreOnce Backup system:• HP StoreOnce 4900 Backup system Installation and Configuration Guide : This document

describes how to install and configure the named product.• HP StoreOnce 2700, 2900, 4500, and 4700 Backup system Installation and Configuration

Guide : This document describes how to install and configure the named products.• HP StoreOnce 2620, 4210/4220, and 4420/4430 Backup system Installation and

Configuration Guide : This document describes how to install and configure the named products.• HP StoreOnce 4900 (44TB) and (60TB) Capacity Expansion Guide : This document describes

how to add 11 x 4TB disks to the disk enclosure and how to add a second disk enclosure. Itis available as both a printed and PDF document.

• HP StoreOnce 4500 and 4700 (24TB) Capacity Expansion Guide : This document describeshow to add a 12–disk expansion shelf. It is available as both a printed and PDF document.

• HP StoreOnce Backup system CLI Reference Guide : This is the complete reference guide forthe CLI command set. Some tasks can only be carried out from the CLI.

•

HP StoreOnce Backup system Linux and UNIX Configuration Guide : This is the configurationguide for Linux and UNIX.

Other useful websites• HP Website: http://www.hp.com• HP Storage Products: http://www.hp.com/go/storage• HP Storage Information Library: http://www.hp.com/go/storage/docs• HP Enterprise Backup Solutions Overview: http://www.hp.com/go/ebs• HP Technical Support website: http://www.hp.com/support• HP Technical Support Downloads website: http://www.hp.com/support/downloads

Contacting HP 261

http://www.hp.com/go/hpsc

http://h17007.www1.hp.com/us/en/storage/info-library/index.aspx

http://www.hp.com/

http://www.hp.com/go/storage




http://www.hp.com/support/downloads

http://www.hp.com/support/downloads




http://www.hp.com/go/storage

http://www.hp.com/

http://h17007.www1.hp.com/us/en/storage/info-library/index.aspx

http://www.hp.com/go/hpsc



• HP Single Point of Connectivity Knowledge (SPOCK) website: http://www.hp.com/storage/spock

• HP partner and store locator: http://www.hp.com/service_locator• White papers and Analyst reports: http://www.hp.com/storage/whitepapers

Typographic conventionsTable 70 Document conventions

ElementConvention

Blue text: Table 70 (page 262) • Cross-reference links and e-mail addresses• A cross reference to the glossary definition of the term

in blue text

email addressesBlue, bold, underlined text

Website addressesBlue, underlined text: http://www.hp.com

Bold text • Keys that are pressed• Text typed into a GUI element, such as a box• GUI elements that are clicked or selected, such as menu

and list items, buttons, tabs, and check boxes

Text emphasisItalic text

Monospace text • File and directory names• System output• Code• Commands, their arguments, and argument values

Monospace, italic text • Code variables• Command variables

Emphasized monospace textMonospace, bold text

WARNING! Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death.

CAUTION: Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.

IMPORTANT: Provides clarifying information or specific instructions.

NOTE: Provides additional information.

TIP: Provides helpful hints and shortcuts.

Customer self repairHP customer self repair (CSR) programs allow you to repair your HP product. If a CSR part needsreplacing, HP ships the part directly to you so that you can install it at your convenience. Someparts do not qualify for CSR. Your HP-authorized service provider will determine whether a repaircan be accomplished by CSR.For more information about CSR, contact your local service provider, or see the CSR website:

http://www.hp.com/go/selfrepair

262 Support and other resources

http://www.hp.com/storage/spock


http://www.hp.com/service_locator

http://www.hp.com/storage/whitepapers

http://www.hp.com/



http://www.hp.com/

http://www.hp.com/storage/whitepapers

http://www.hp.com/service_locator





A Regulatory informationFor important safety, environmental, and regulatory information, see Safety and Compliance Information for Server, Storage, Power, Networking, and Rack Products, available at http://www.hp.com/support/Safety-Compliance-EnterpriseProducts.

Belarus Kazakhstan Russia marking

Manufacturer and Local Representative InformationManufacturer’s information:• Hewlett-Packard Company, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, California 94304, U.S.Local Representative information Russian:• HP Russia: ЗАО “Хьюлетт-Паккард А.О.”, 125171, Россия, г. Москва, Ленинградское

шоссе, 16А, стр.3, тел/факс: +7 (495) 797 35 00, +7 (495) 287 89 05• HP Belarus: ИООО «Хьюлетт-Паккард Бел», 220030, Беларусь, г. Минск, ул.

Интернациональная, 36-1, офис 722-723, тел.: +375 (17) 392 28 18, факс: +375 (17)392 28 21

• HP Kazakhstan: ТОО «Хьюлетт-Паккард (К), 050040, Казахстан, г. Алматы, Бостандыкскирайон, ул. Тимирязева, 28В, 1 этаж, тел./факс: +7 (727) 355 35 50, +7 (727) 355 3551

Local Representative information Kazakh:• HP Kazakhstan: ЖШС «Хьюлетт-Паккард (К)»,Қазақстан, Алматық., Бостандық ауданы,

Тимирязев к-сі, 28В, тел./факс: +7 (727) 355 35 50, +7 (727) 355 35 51Manufacturing date:

The manufacturing date is defined by the serial number.CCSYWWZZZZ (HP serial number format for this product)

Valid date formats include:• YWW, where Y indicates the year counting from within each new decade, with 2000 as the

starting point; for example, 238: 2 for 2002 and 38 for the week of September 9. In addition,2010 is indicated by 0, 2011 by 1, 2012 by 2, 2013 by 3, and so forth.

• YYWW, where YY indicates the year, using a base year of 2000; for example, 0238: 02for 2002 and 38 for the week of September 9.

Turkey RoHS material content declarationTürkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

Ukraine RoHS material content declarationОбладнання відповідає вимогам Технічного регламенту щодо обмеження використання деянебезпечних речовин в електричному та електронному обладнанні, затвердженого постановоКабінету Міністрів України від 3 грудня 2008 № 1057

Warranty informationHP Storage Productshttp://www.hp.com/support/Storage-Warranties

Belarus Kazakhstan Russia marking 263

http://www.hp.com/support/Safety-Compliance-EnterpriseProducts


http://www.hp.com/support/Storage-Warranties

http://www.hp.com/support/Storage-Warranties





Index

Aactive connections tab, 35

AD authentication mode, 50 AD domain

add StoreOnce appliance, 51CIFS share access, 66grant users access using MMC, 67

AD domain, leaving, 59administration

housekeeping page, 143administrator role, 10appliance

definition, 85appliance functions, 21appliance tab

replication, 87authentication mode

none, 45user, 45

Bbackup fails, 245

mapping deleted, 107bandwidth limiting, 93, 121bandwidth limiting windows

StoreOnce Catalyst, 121barcode, 29 , 36barcode characters, 28barcodes

VTL cartridge barcode bulk edit, 40beacon LED, 158Belarus Kazakhstan Russia EAC marking, 263BIOSupgrading, 249blackout windows, 94

housekeeping, 146StoreOnce Catalyst, 120

bonding modes, 213browser buttons not displayed, 14

Ccartridge size, 28

defining, 28cartridges

creating, 37editing max size, 39moving/unloading, 39removing, 37removing all, 38write protecting, 38

cartridges tab, 36Catalyst, 115

benefits, 115certificate

exporting, 178importing, 178

CIFS serverassign AD groups as administrators, 58assign AD user adminitrators, 54configure AD authentication mode, 50create local user, 47

remove users, 59CIFS server tab, 44CIFS share

configure AD domain share access, 66configure with none authentication mode, 65configure with user authentication mode, 65

CIFS sharescreate, 64timeout problems, 244using under Windows, 79

clear leftover disk, 158CLI

running commands, 16cli see web management interfaceCLI login, 242clients tab

StoreOnce Catalyst, 118cold boot, 11collect data, 208collects logs, 209command line interface, 16configuration

save and restore, 229SNMP, 252troubleshoot, 246

configuration files, 229deleting, 233configuration text file

manual recovery, 229configuration zip file

restored settings, 231configure

email, 205configuring

support tickets, 207configuring the network, 216connecting from backup system

troubleshoot, 244contacting HP, 261conventions

document, 262text symbols, 262

createcartridge, 37device, 30Federated store, 127store, 127

creation time, 27custom network configuration, 218customer self repair, 262

264 Index



DD2DBS Generic Library, 32data jobs

StoreOnce catalyst, 130deduplication, 27delete

cartridge, 37Federated store, 127library, 32store, 127

delete allcartridge, 38

delete support ticket, 210demo license, 17device configuration, 197devices

create new, 30edit details, 31

devices page, 23Devices tab

deleting cartridges on, 38

documentconventions, 262documentation

related information, 261download support ticket, 210drive emulation , 28drives

defining number of, 28

EEAC marking

Belarus Kazakhstan Russia, 263edit

device details, 31Federated store details, 127slot mappings name, 99store details, 127

emailconfiguration, 205

email events, 206configuration, 207test, 206

email settings, 205EML-E series Library, 33emulation types

tape devices, 32emulations see library emulation typesenclosure

monitoring, 156 , 160encryption

Data at Rest, 19Data in Flight, 19

ESL-E series Library, 33EuroAsian Economic Commission (EAC), 263event history

replication, 95events

email notification, 206 , 207

events log, 226exporting a certificate, 178

Ffactory default network configuration, 218Federated stores

adding members, 127create from existing store, 127edit details, 127removing members, 127

fibre channelchange drive assignments, 35edit settings, 24port assignments, 24

fibre channel portschange drive assignments, 35

fibre channel tab, 23firewalls

with replication, 93flexible emulation, 33

Ggeneral settingsreplication, 92

GUI see web management interface

Hhard disk

beacon led, 158monitoring, 158

hard disk firmwareupgrading, 249hardware pages, 152hardware problem details, 150hardware problem report, 150hardware replacement, 251help

obtaining, 261housekeeping

blackout windows, 146housekeeping graph, 145housekeeping page, 143HP

technical support, 261HP 2700

warranty information, 167HP 2900

warranty information, 167HP 4500warranty information, 166

HP 4700warranty information, 165

HP 4900warranty information, 164

HP StoreOnce Backup systemproduct overview, 9

IIBM-TS3500, 33

importing certificates, 178

265



inbound StoreOnce Catalyst copy jobs, 137Instant On license, 17Interface Information tab, 33IP address of appliance

identify, 86iSCSI

initiator name, 29troubleshoot, 250

iSCSI settings tab, 25

Llast written, cartridges, 36leave AD domain, 59libraries

delete, 32library emulation, 28library emulation types

D2DBS Generic, 32EML E Series, 33ESL E Series, 33IBM-TS3500, 33

MSL G3 Series (2x24), 33MSL G3 Series (4x48), 33MSL G3 Series (8x96), 33

licensing, 17applying a full license, 18demo, 243requirements, 17

licensing requirementsStoreOnce Catalyst, 115

local settingsreplication, 92

location, cartridges, 36login, 14

Mmapping deleted

backup fails, 107max size, cartridges, 36maximum jobs

replication, setting, 93media changer port

defining number of, 27MIBs, 252modify support ticket, 207move cartridge, 39

MSL G3 series (2x24) Library, 33MSL G3 series (4x48) Library, 33MSL G3 series (8x96) Library, 33multiple users, 244

NNAS

assign host permissions for shares, 76CIFS server tab, 44create CIFS shares, 64create NFS shares, 74create shares, 62

delete shares, 79

edit share details, 78functions, 43list of shares, 61replication wizard, 108root squash configuration, 78secure ports configuration, 78server configuration, 43server configuration page, 43share configuration, 43source and target share details, 106

NAS authentication modes, 45NAS share configuration page, 61NAS share mappings

replication, 105network

example environment, 215troubleshooting, 246

network bonds, 213network configuration, 211

add custom, 219basics, 211

configuring the network, 216current network configuration, 217custom configuration list, 218delete custom configuration, 225edit custom, 225factory default, 218hierarchy, 212introduction, 11list, 217view a custom configuration, 223

network configuration components, 211network configuration guidelines, 215network port numbering, 213NFS

configure server hosts, 59mounting a share through CLI, 80mounting a share using Windows, 81

NFS server tab, 59nfs share

state handle error, 245NFS shares

create using GUI, 74using with Linux, 83using with UNIX, 83

node

monitoring, 153 , 158

Oonline help

navigating, 15OST plug-in

StoreOnce Catalyst stores, 115out of sync settings, 93outbound StoreOnce Catalyst copy jobs, 133

Ppassword

default, 14

266 Index



passwords, 199pause housekeeping, 146pause replication jobs, 95pause StoreOnce Catalyst jobs, 121performance

troubleshoot, 246permissions

source appliance, 90power off

using CLI, 13power on

manual, 11power on and off, 11power on/off

troubleshoot, 249product overview, 9

RRAID5, 234RAID6, 234reboot

using CLI, 14recoveryreplication, 103 , 111

recovery wizardreverse replication, 103 , 112

regulatory information, 263Turkey RoHS material content declaration, 263Ukraine RoHS material content declaration, 263

remote supportalerts, 161configuring, 168customer information page, 170defined, 161entering and modifying customer information, 170entering and modifying entitlement information for

server, 171entering and modifying entitlement information for

storage, 172entering and modifying entitlement information for

switches, 173fields defined, 170main page, 167modifying, 168server page, 171status page, 174

storage page, 172switch page, 173remote support setup, 161replication

and firewalls, 93appliance tab, 87bandwidth limiting tab, 93blackout windows, 94event history, 95general settings, 92local appliance, 92NAS mappings page, 105

pause jobs, 95

recovering source, 103 , 111source appliances tab, 89status tab, 86target appliances tab, 88virtual tape mappings page, 97

replication fails, 245replication functions, 85replication ports, 93replication recovery

over WAN, 114using wizard, 103 , 112

replication wizard, 99NAS, 108

reportinghardware problem, 150storage space usage, 151

Reporting Centralabout, 176exporting a certificate, 178generating reports, 187group configuration, 180

importing certificates, 178modifying appliance details, 179registering an appliance, 176unregistering an appliance, 179

reporting page, 148restore

configuration, 232full configuration, 233replication, 103 , 111

restore configurationzip file, 232

root squashNAS, 78

Ssave

configuration, 232searching

replication event history, 96Secure Erase, 19security features, 19settings tab

StoreOnce Catalyst, 118share mapping

remove, 107

share permissionsNAS, 76share synchronization

logging progress, 93slot mappings

edit name, 99slots

defining number of, 28SNMP

configuration, 252MIBs, 252

software update, 248

source and target library mappings, 97

267



source appliance permissions, 90source appliances tab, 89status

reporting page, 148system activity, 147

status tabreplication, 86StoreOnce Catalyst, 117

storagemonitoring, 156

storage shelftroubleshoot, 250

storage space usage report, 151StoreOnca Catalyst stores

Catalyst store details tab, 125StoreOnce Backup system

logging on to CLI, 16logging on to GUI, 14

StoreOnce CatalystOST plug-in, 115pause jobs, 121

StoreOnce Catalyst storesadding members to Federated store, 127bandwidth limiting windows tab, 121blackout windows tab, 120Catalyst stores page, 124change to Federated store, 127clients tab, 118create new, 127data jobs tab, 130delete, 127edit details, 127features, 115functions, 115GUI pages, 116inbound copy jobs tab, 137item summary tab, 128licensing requirements, 115outbound copy Jobs tab, 133permissions tab, 128removing members from Federated store, 127settings tab, 118status tab, 117system information messages, 141terminology, 116

stores

create new Federated, 127delete Federated, 127support ticket, 243

collects logs, 209delete, 210download, 210modify, 207

support tickets, 207data collection, 208

symbols in text, 262system activity page, 147

Ttape devices

emulation types, 32target appliances tab, 88target libraries

making visible, 41technical support

HP, 261test

email notification, 206text symbols, 262troubleshoot

backup or replication, 245browser buttons missing, 14configuration, 246connecting from backup system, 244iSCSI, 250network, 246perfromance, 246power on/off, 249storage shelf, 250

using 10GbE ports, 249Turkey RoHS material content declaration, 263typographic conventions, 262

UUkraine RoHS material content declaration, 263Ultrium VT, 32unload cartridge, 39upgrade licenses, 247upgrades

BIOS firmware, 249hard disk firmware, 249

used size, cartridges, 36user

create local user for CIFS server, 47user management, 199user roles, 10user types, 10user/operator role, 10using 10GbE ports

troubleshoot, 249

Vvirtual tape devices

devices page, 23virtual tape mappings

replication, 97visible target libraries, 41

VLAN, 248vlan guidelines, 214vlan subnets, 214

VT mappingssource and target mappings, 97

VTLdevice details tab, 26fibre channel settings tab, 23libraries page, 25

replication wizard, 99

268 Index



Wwarranty information

HP 2700, 167HP 2900, 167HP 4500, 166HP 4700, 165HP 4900, 164HP Storage products,263

Documents

HP StoreOnce Backup System User Guide